Home
        IXP200 USER MANUAL
         Contents
1.                                                                      Tagholders menu vsd              gt  System Off line  lt   Present  Administrator s Tag to  Controller  F  y      F5  Tagholders Settings  m   menu Y D D menu  A   see separate diagram  for details of Settings menu   AA  Add Edit     menu   see separate  diagramsfor  details of  these menus   5  Delete  menu    Tagholders Menu Options    See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 6   12    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Delete Menu    The Delete Menu is accessed from the Add Delete Menu as shown above  This  menu enables the Administrator to delete any Tag in the system as required   The Delete Menu is shown below            lt   Tagholders  gt   To from Settings Menu       Options    All Tagholders             Selected Option                      Store new data                               Refresh old data       Delete menu vsd    Delete Menu  Add  Edit Function    This function allows the addition or editing of Tag information  Access Groups  can only be configured using the PC software  They can then be allocated to  Tags using the menu           June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities                 System Off line e                                                                                                                     
2.                                  Table 7   Registration Interface and Registration Readers       oooocononnonicccacnnnnnninnnanns  Table 8   Group 3   Multifunction Terminals    nninnnnnnnnnnnnnnicconccnnnininia narrar rc  Table 9   Wiegand Readers                                               rn rr rra rr  Table 10   Third party Biometric Readers    oooononnccocicnnnccocnnonannnnnnnnononanann anna nnnnnnnnns  O June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 1    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       SECTION 1   SYSTEM OVERVIEW  GENERAL    The IXP200 Software is designed to work in conjunction with an Access Control  System made up of Impro ImproX Hardware Terminals    ImproX Terminals   The ImproX Terminals can be divided into two groups  each being used for  different purposes  namely     e Reader Terminals can be used as Access Readers for Doors and Lifts   elevators     e The Input Output Terminals can be used for Building Management and  Lift  elevator  Control  e g  116 and 016 Units      e The Reader Terminal group includes Readers that detect RF Tags   e g   PT  TA  etc       e Remote devices include Remote Readers  such as the ImproX MR   KHR   Antenna Readers  and Remote MIFARE Readers     During the Configuration process each Terminal is assigned to control a specific  Door   including Lifts  elevators  or for Building Management     Types of Units   All units included in Tables 1   8 may be used in a
3.                       Present  Administrator s Tag to  Controller  F    E   E5  Tagholders Settings  m   menu menu      see separate diagram  for details of Settings menu   y  Add Edit     menu  A  Suspended    E5  menu      F5 Name p  e menu     see separate D  diagrams for  details of Level     these menus   E5  menu  D  Access Group _     A E5  menu                  PIN  E  menu  Tagholders Add Edit menu  vsd  Add  Edit Sub menus  Add  Edit Menu    This menu has several sub menus as shown in the diagram Add  Edit Menus   above    The sub menus permit the Administrator to      a  Select a Tagholder  by either presenting a Tag or scrolling for a Tag using  the keys  If the Tag presented is not in the database  then the LCD will  indicate that it is a new Tag  and then the user can configure the  Tagholder s name  etc           June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 14  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities        b  If the Tag is in the database  then it will be located for editing    c  Suspend access permission for the selected Tagholder     a  Change the name of the selected Tagholder    Change the Access Group of the selected Tagholder     b  Change the access Level of the selected Tagholder     c  Change the PIN of the selected Tagholder     The Add Edit Menu is entered via the Tagholders Menu as shown in the  Add  Edit Sub menus diagram above  The various sub menus are described  below     Selecting a Tagholder  In each
4.            7  Main Application Window    ooonnnccnnnnnnnnoniconacnnnnr cn nana nn r rra rra ran rr 9  Auto ID  Database Connection and Communication Status Icons             9  Active Transaction Panel    10  Active Transaction Panel Fields and Buttons    oooooococccnonnocicconcnnnnncncnnnnn 11  Alarm Panel Fields and Buttons eeens 12  DOOr Status  Panel sist since hist nn dent hs decades en N  E En et 13  Door Status Pan  ls    ss is tisane tn Aimants 13  Building Graphics Software    16  Graphics  features  ss seine tendent der en entends 17  Addressing of Units  stimule tin dt Ares tend 17  A Fixed  Address    ee ein ceca peinte ier te rides ne corne Eaa nie 17  A Logical Address caca tn Re ne Gees  17  Recording of Installation Information    17  IXP200 Software Start up                                                 ana nannr 18  New System   Logging on for the First Time    18  Auto Identification Unit Detection    19  Performing Autor Discusi  n cis tania 19  SYSTEM STARTUP unicos a ld dt 20  SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE esere 20  IXP200 System Configuration Requirements                                         21  CHAPTER 2   CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION    23  GENERAL SE Re id aaa coli 23  Port T e T ibedeseaeved ad eaavtdenta ces 23  Port 2   RS232 RS48 5i radis dan scared a ads 23  Port SE RS23 Li a aaa 23  Digital  OUtpUtS   adicta did 23  Power Control Alarm Arming Modes    23  Power CO a te ES AN EnReS nga AS 24  Alarm Arming Disarming   oooooccccnoninnonicononinn
5.           CAUTION  The security of the network and the computers on which the software is  installed remains the responsibility of the customer  If the computer on which  the system is installed is compromised  or the network is compromised  then it  may become possible to make unauthorized modifications to the configuration  of the system  and physical security may be breached     It is strongly recommended that the latest security updates are obtained and  applied on a regular basis to all computers on which any component of the  system is running     Physical access to the computers running the system must also be controlled  to  ensure that access by unauthorized persons does not occur        viii       Scope       SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL   This manual contains all the information necessary to correctly install and  configure the IXP200 System Software  In addition  it describes how to use the  Software together with the associated ImproX and 3    party Hardware  and  provides insight into the effects of the various options and how to select them     Details of compatible Hardware are also provided   RELATED PUBLI CATIONS  The following related publications are produced by Impro Technologies      An Installation Manual is supplied with each individual Hardware unit     A PSC includes more in depth information than an Installation Manaul  A PSC is  available for each individual ImproX Hardware unit  on our web site  at  www impro net     LXP200 System Hardware Installation Ma
6.          Person Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help          Back     gt      A A  search Egravorites meda  4   Ex  BH                         James Nigel             Haines             Company Details       Acme Electrical                Date Filter   2003 06 02 to 2003 07 31    Transaction Report      Address ja http   localhost webreports servletinet impro ipx2 web webreports PersonReport       Go  Links El  1                                                                          No   Location   Bet  TramsactiomDate     Main Door Allowed In 2003 06 11 14 34 56  EE Main Door Allowed In 2003 06 11 14 35 47  EE Car Park Allowed In 2003 06 11 14 47 05  EE Accounts Door Denied Door Out 2003 06 11 144731  Ea Rear Door In Denied Door In 2003 06 11 14 48 40  Eee Lab Out Denied Door Out 2003 06 11 15 31 07  Ea Lab In Denied Door In 2003 06 11 15 32 51  Pas Main Door Allowed In 2003 06 25 15 02 10  Ea Accounts Door Denied Door In 2003 06 25 15 02 49  Return to the Web Reports Main page   a FFF  EE tocalintranet    Person Report   Transaction Report section    See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 35      IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Zone Occupancy Report                   f ra  Zone Occupancy Report   11  y  Submit   Export Report CSv  i 5  FL  Rain to the Web Reporte Main page A  4   me  Zone   Zone 1 a  CE EA AA es eee ea  IT   SE recite  mon   
7.         June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  4  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       CHAPTER 2   FIRMWARE UPGRADE UTILITY  GENERAL    The Firmware Upgrade utility provides several features      a  Firmware Upgrade with units in the System     b  System Tools     c  Miscellaneous facilities including    e Setting the Logical Address of the Controller or a Terminal   e Setting a Default Message for display on the Controller LCD   e Configuring the Controller Port for RS232 or RS485 operation   e Clearing the Controller memory     TOP MENU OPTIONS       Firmware Upgrade ER  Bir          xj  File Config File Versions Help  Top Menu options  The Firmware Upgrade top menu options are as follows      File   this offers the options Choose Locale  Translate  and Exit  For the use  of Choose Locale and Translate see Section 3 Chapter 14     Config   this offers the options Port and Timeout     e Port permits the selection of PC port 1 2 3 or 4 as the communications port  for the IXP200     e Timeout permits the calculation of the minimum timeout period     File Versions   this allows the display of current firmware versions of the  upgrade files on disk     Help   this provides access to About information        Extend timeout values E x               Minimum comms timeout  m sec   300 bes   LA  J  rest    Max Time      Average Time    Extend timeout values dialog             O J
8.        LCD Screen          Product release        meeting at 1000       _9        New Message Dialog       Duration   Duration of this message    Mode   Displays the mode associated with the message    LCD Panel   The text of the message as it will appear on the LCD  display    Apply   Accepts the new or edited message    Cancel i This button rejects the new entry       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 118    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 9   Messages        1  Click in the Duration Field  and entered period of time that the message  must be displayed  i e  10s   10 seconds       2  In the Mode field  Normal is the default setting  The other options are not  available with this version of Software      3  In the LCD Panel field  click in the window and then type in the  appropriate message to be displayed  Type spaces to fill a line and do not  enter carriage returns      4  Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or click Cancel to  reject new data     NOTE  Failure to click Apply in the Message Panel after adding a new  Message or editing an existing one would result in the data being lost     Editing an Existing Message  To Edit a Message  proceed as follows       1  Click on Configuration on the toolbar and select Messages from the  dropdown menu      2  In the Message Text pane  select the required message to be edited  and  then double click on the highlighted messa
9.       10  Click the Record field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed  Use  the mouse to select the setting for the time slot      11 Click the Denied Alarm field to select it  A dropdown menu will be  displayed  Use the mouse to select the setting for the time slot      12  Click the LED field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed  Use  the mouse to select the setting for the time slot      13  Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or Cancel to reject  new data     NOTE  Changing to another screen before clicking on the Door Mode Patterns  Apply button  would result in the new entry being rejected     Deleting an Existing Door Mode Pattern    To Delete a Door Mode Pattern  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Door icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 55  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration        2  Select the Door Pattern tab      1  In the top pane  select the required name to be deleted in the Name field   and then click Delete     to remove data from System     NOTE   A pattern cannot be deleted while it is still allocated to any door     ARG  101 x   File Hardware Configuration Tags Reports Help                   1 Default Tag Mode    2  Weekday       4 Weekend       Pattern Name    Weekday  Pattern Time Slot     Nof Start Time   End Time   Mode P
10.       Main Door  Rear Door  Lifts    4 Laboratory    e                   Typical Access Pattern   Door Tab Dialog    Access Pattern   Door Tab       Access Doors   Displays the doors selected for access   No Access Doors   Display the doors not selected for access      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  87    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups       Add   Moves the selected doors from the No Access  list to the Allowed Access list   Remove   Moves the selected doors from the Allowed    Access list to the No Access list      7  Click on the Floor tab  the Access Pattern   Floor Tab Dialog as shown  below is displayed  In the No Access Floors field  all the floors of the  building are listed      8  Select the required floors    9  Click Add to transfer the floors to the Access Floors field     NOTE   7he Floor Tab is empty unless the System is using an O16 Terminal for  lift  elevator  control and the Lift  elevator  Door has been selected for  the Access Pattern     PM Access Pattern Setting  x   Day  amp Time  Door Floor      Access Floors  No Access Floors     First Floor Third Floor  Second Floor         CET                      Typical Access Pattern   Floor Tab Dialog    ACCESS PATTERN   FLOOR TAB    NOTE    f the Lift  elevator  Door has not been allocated for Door access  no  floors appear in this list     Access Floors   Displays the floors selected for access    
11.       Site  SLA  01000000      Q  al Backup Now      Backup dialog                 2  By default the backup path is the  XP200 database folder but this can be  changed     3  To change the Backup path  click on the     Icon  and select the  required path     4  The number of backups to be retained must also be specified  Set the  required number of backups to be retained by typing this number into the  box provided  3 in this example  next to Number of backups to be kept in  backup folder    NOTE  Backups made prior to this number of backups will be  discarded by the System  The default is 3  meaning that only  the latest 3 backups are retained  and the next backup will  overwrite the oldest of these     5  Select the days of the week on that the backup operation is required by  deleting the ticks from days on that backup is not required     6  Set the time of day for each selected day at that backup is required by  typing in the time in the boxes provided  in 24 hour clock format      7  Leave the Site Logical Address  SLA  as the default 01000000       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  150    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 15   Database Backup        8  Once the parameters have been selected  click Apply to save and close the  dialog  Alternatively click Cancel to close and ignore changes to the  parameters      9  Automatic Backup can be scheduled to run at a specific time on one o
12.      2  When the Host PC is reconnected to the IXP200 Controller  the PC s  database is automatically updated with the latest transactions from the  IXP200 Controller s database  If changes are made on the Host PC s  database while it is disconnected from the  XP200 Controller e g   adding new Doors etc  a Full Upload  refer to Section 2  is then  required to update the IXP200 Controller database with the updated  configuration data from the System Database     3  Updates to the System Database can also be made at the Editing  Workstation  if used   Note that the Host PC must be online to the  Controller for any changes to be propagated to the Controller    4 The ImproX MfT Multifunction Terminal is able to validate Tags even  when communications with the Controller are disrupted   t will  continue to allow access to Tags that have previously been presented  to it  but will deny access to other Tags  When comms is restored   transactions completed during the comms failure are uploaded to the  Controller database           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 19  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       Graphics Software  The Graphics Software comprises two components  namely the Designer Module  and the Runtime Module     The Designer Module is a separate Module and allows the user to develop  various plans  and is described in the Impro Graphics Designer Module manual     The Runtime Module is integrated
13.      7  The Find New Hardware Screen will be displayed     Add Remove Hardware Wizard       Find New Hardware ES   Windows can also detect hardware that is not Plug and Play compatible  ko          When Windows detects new hardware  it checks the current settings for the device  and installs the correct driver     Do you want Windows to search for your new hardware        C No    want to select the hardware from a list        lt  Back Cancel       Find New Hardware Screen   8  Select No    want to select the hardware from a list      9  The reason for this selection is that the loopback adapter is a system    program and not a physical device and therefore the actions required have  to be specifically chosen      10  Click Next to display the list           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information          Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Find New Hardware De   Windows can also detect hardware that is not Plug and Play compatible  RS    When Windows detects new hardware  it checks the current settings for the device  and installs the correct driver     Do you want Windows to search for your new hardware   C Yes  search for new hardware      No  want to select the hardware from alist             Find New Hardware Screen     11  The Hardware Type Screen will be displayed        Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Hardware Type D   What type of hardw
14.      Configuration Reports are divided into Door and Access Group Configuration  Reports  Input and Time Triggered Configuration Reports and Tag Configuration  Reports     DOOR AND ACCESS GROUP CONFI GURATI ON REPORTS    Door and Access Group Configuration Reports include    e Access Group Configuration Reports    e Door Access Configuration Reports    e Door Configuration Reports    e Door Mode Configuration Reports    e Terminal Configuration Reports     Common Report Screen Buttons    Each Report screen in this group includes two common buttons  The operation  of these buttons is as follows      e Click on Submit to update the displayed Report information        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 12  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       e Click on Export Report  CSV  to export the displayed Report in CSV   Comma Separated Value  format for MS Excel and similar programs     Access Group Configuration Report    A  Access Group Configuration    Microsoft Internet Explorer E lal  x   File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea  Back         A   Qsearch Favorites meda   Es  S                           Address fa http    localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports AccessGroupConfigReport v   Go   Links  gt                                    Access Group Configuration         A  Submit Export Report  CSV      Ma     l  Return to the Configuration main page EN GI  MEND  no    Name Pato  Sun Mon Tue We
15.      Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       A software utility which permits the use of Graphics developed using the  Graphics Designer Software Module  described in the Graphics User Manual    XP331 0 0 GB XX  is incorporated into the   XP200 software     Graphics features    The principal Graphics Runtime software features are      a  Display of Base Plans and Floor Plans of the areas under access control    b  Display  on these plans  of alarms generated within the System     c  The ability to acknowledge alarms from the Plans     The use of the Graphics Runtime Software is described in Section 3  Chapter 8  of this manual     Addressing of Units    The ImproX units each have two types of addresses  namely      A Fixed Address    This is a unique  unchanging address  which is allocated at the factory and  stored in the memory of the unit during manufacture  This number appears on  the printed label attached to the unit     A Logical Address    This is assigned to a unit during the Auto Identification  Auto ID  process and is  then used by the Host PC to address the Controller and the Terminals     The first step in configuring a System is to establish the Logical Addresses and  link these to the Fixed Addresses  This process is described in the following  Auto ID sub section of this manual     Recording of Installation   nformation    When ImproX units are physically installed  the Fixed Address associated with  each unit must be recorded by the in
16.     DOOR STATE COMMENTS  Closed and locked Normal condition while no access is made   Closed and unlocked During Open mode or Emergency Open mode        Normal condition during access  as detected by a    Open  door open sensor           Open for longer than the   Abnormal condition  door remains continually open   specified limit as detected by a door open sensor           The door state is obtained by polling the Controller at a specified polling  frequency     The icon state is refreshed when the Controller is polled and will remain fixed  until the next poll     The user may specify the Polling Frequency and the Door Open Time  Limit  This Door Open Time Limit should not be confused with the Door  Open Duration specified on the Reader Panel  The Door Open Duration can  be set for an individual door and will generate an alarm if the door is left open  longer than the duration specified     The Door Open Time Limit for this panel is a parameter for the Door Status  panel only and applies equally to all doors  If a door is left open longer than the    time limit  the icon changes to a flashing image  No alarm transaction is  generated     Polling frequency   5 seconds  Default   Minimum 1 second     Monitored door open time limit f 300 seconds  Default      Set these parameters from the Controller Panel using the Configuration System  Menu  see paragraphs under Setting the Door Status Polling Parameters      Additional Functions  Several other functions are accessible from t
17.     Data subject to change without notice    Page 1 3       Section 1   System Overview       125 KHZ REMOTE READERS FOR GROUP 1 TERMI NALS       Table 3   125 kHz Remote Readers for Group 1 Terminals       This table lists the Remote Readers and other ImproX units  acting as Remote  Readers  designed for use with the ImproX  PT  TA or iTA     Mifare Remote Readers for use with these Terminals are listed in Table 4        ImproX Harsh Environment Keypad    ImproX KHR Remote Reader           ImproX KR ImproX ABS Keypad Remote Reader        l th Im i i  proX Harsh Environment Micro    3   IAA MHR Remote Reader           ImproX MR ImproX Micro Remote Reader   ImproX Time and Attendance Remote    Reader   ImproX TAR  This can be used with the ImproX PT    or TA  but not with the ImproX TT         Industrialized ImproX TAR    s   gt     ImproX TAR   This can be used with the ImproX PT  Ea or TA  but not with the ImproX TT                  NOTE   The  mproX IR and RF units are treated as Remotes by the software           O June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 4  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 1   System Overview          Table 3   125 kHz Remote Readers for Group 1 Terminals       wy ImproX IR ImproX Infra red Receiver          ImproX RF ImproX UHF Receiver             MULTI  MODE READERS       Table 4   Multi mode  Mifare  amp  FeliCa  Remote Readers  Group 1  amp  3  Terminals       These Remote Readers can be used with t
18.     Lift  elevator  Control is an optional aspect of Door Configuration     DOORS  READERS AND DOOR MODE PATTERNS  CONFIGURATION    The next item to be configured is the Doors  The purpose of this configuration  is to define each Door and to assign Terminals to the Doors that they must  control     To access the Door Panel  click on the fi  Icon   The Door Panel shown  next includes previously configured Doors      ici    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help          3  Rear Door  4 Laboratory                Door   Entry   Exit            Number  E Elevator Lift Door F   Name  Main Door   Entry Terminal  fooscsteeqHR  Select   Alarm Arm     Disable     Enable   Exit Terminal  004C546B MR  Select   APB Mode  C off C Relax    Strict  APB Zone  h Door Entry Code ass    Day Mode   Enable Bell I           Transactions   Alarms   Door Status         Door and Readers Panel          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 31  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       Doors and Readers Panel Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of all the fields associated with the Door and Reader  Panel  the information displayed in the fields and what the buttons    functions  are     Door Tab Panel   Top Pane    No    Door number    Name   The name given to the door    NOTE   This name must be taken from the Unit Location Chart    Add   Allows a new do
19.     SECTION 8  APPENDICES   APPENDIX 1   BASIC WINDOWS INFORMATION FOR THE USER    3  Graphic User Interface    3  IPADDRESS x grd aa Rbescaracecveca Silo TADO Taaa ai den De NOT S eos 4  VIRTUAL NETWORK ADAPT ER nanim aan eana a e e ata 4  Computer which has a Modem Card installed as well as a Network Card     4   For Computers which have a network card but NO server    4  Assigning automatic private IP addresses for a simple network    5   For computers which have no network card installed    5  IPSCOMPIQUIATION sn en bee ete cidade tay cas anti eh 6   Win 2000   Setting up a Loop back Adapter    6  APPENDIX 2   ENGLISH TERMINOLOGY rnnt 18  REGIONAL DIFFERENCES IN ENGLISH TERMINOLOGY          ccccesseeeseeeeeeeeaees 18      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 1    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 2  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       APPENDIX 1   BASIC WINDOWS INFORMATION FOR THE  USER              Open  Scan for Viruses  Add to Zip    Send To     Cut          Create Shortcut  Delete  Rename    Properties      j 4 so a   e  asa ASA   Ej Acrobat Reader   i Inbox   Microsoft Outlook  27 Microsoft Word  vonasa    Conventions used in MicroSoft Windows can be puzzling to any new user and  especially so when applie
20.     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics       CHAPTER 12   GRAPHICS    GRAPHICS SOFTWARE    The Graphics Software comprises two components  namely the Designer Module  and the Runtime Module     The Designer Module allows the user to develop various plans  and is described  in the Impro Graphics Designer Module manual     The Runtime Module allows the Graphics Software to display plans derived using  the Graphics Designer Software Module  and to permit the monitoring and  control of various System parameters by means of icons superimposed on the  plans  The Runtime Module is integrated into the  XP200 Software     Features    The principal Graphics Runtime Software features are      a  Display of Base Plans and Floor Plans of the areas under access control    b  Display  on these plans  of alarms generated within the System     c  The ability to acknowledge alarms from the Plans     Using the Graphics Runtime Module    Once suitable graphics have been developed using the Impro Graphics  Designer  these Graphics are automatically accessed from the IXP200 System  once the IXP200 Software is run     The Graphics Base Plan will be displayed in the Main Application Window on  startup  It will be immediately be replaced by the relevant Floor Plan whenever  an alarm is received     At any time it is possible to toggle between the Graphics display and any other  configuration screen currently selected by clicking on the W4 Icon   Click the Al  Home  icon to display
21.     yyy  aaa    ojoje              Transactions   Alarms         Seq it Terminal           Poling started  oe  0 com  Input Terminal Configuration Example   4  Tick the box if an Input Channel must trigger an alarm when monitored for  any specified state  see the Event Triggered Actions paragraph            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 61  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals        5  Leave the box unticked  unchecked  if no alarm should be triggered  The  alarm setting does not inhibit Actions associated with monitored Inputs   only the triggering of Alarms      6  Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or Cancel to reject new  data     NOTE  Changing to another panel before clicking on the 1 0 Terminal   s Apply    button  would result in the new entry being rejected  This must be  done for each Terminal        This concludes the configuration of the I nput  Output Terminals                 June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 62  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       CHAPTER 5   TIME EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION  CONFI GURATI ON    GENERAL    This chapter describes the configuration of Time and Event Triggered Actions     Action Types    There are two types of Actions available  namely Relay and Message     a  Relay   Drives an
22.    IXP200       Access Control Software    Software Version 6 0          USER MANUAL             Manual ref  No  IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007                   IMPORTANT NOTICE  In the event of any discrepancies in meaning between this  the original English  version of the manual  and any other version of this manual  in whatever language   the information in this version shall take precedence           IXP200 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM    WELCOME    SOFTWARE   VERSION 6 0     USER MANUAL    LIST OF CONTENTS    WHAT S NEW IN THIS RELEASE    SCOPE    NETWORK AND COMPUTER SECURITY    SECTION 1  SECTION 2  SECTION 3  SECTION 4  SECTION 5  SECTION 6  SECTION 7  SECTION 8    SYSTEM OVERVIEW  SOFTWARE INSTALLATION  SYSTEM CONFI GURATI ON  REPORTS   UTILITIES   MANUAL EDITING FACILITY  GLOSSARY OF TERMS  APPENDICES    Each Section of this manual includes a detailed List of Contents for that    Section       Software or firmware changes may be made which do not require  changes to this manual  This issue of this manual will remain valid for all  future software updates until changes in the software require it to be    updated     Welcome       WELCOME    The IXP200 Series Software is a single  or multi user access control System  using the ImproX range of Hardware  It is designed for use with Windows 98  Second Edition  2000  NT SP6a  or XP Professional     The Software includes reporting and alarm monitoring capabilities     This manual describes the installation and use of the IX
23.    System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 22  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       CHAPTER 2   CONTROLLER CONFI GURATI ON  GENERAL    The Controller has three Serial Ports  two Digital Outputs  relay contacts  and  four Digital Inputs     Port 1   RS485    This Port is the Terminal Bus using the RS485 Protocol  All the IXP200  Terminals  Readers and Digital Input Output Terminals are connected to this  Bus for communication with the Controller     Port 2   RS232  RS485    This Port is the PC Bus using the RS232 or RS485 Protocol  selectable manually  in Controller Editing Facility   see Section 6 of this manual      This bus connects the Controller directly to the PC when this is located close to  the Controller  If the Controller is more than 25 m away from the PC then  either an RS232 RS485 Converter  the ImproX ProxPal  or a USB RS485  Converter  the ImproX RS Registration Interface  is required  and this port must  be set to RS485 using the Controller manual editing functions     Port 3   RS232    This port could be used for a serial printer  for example  but is not used in  this version of the software     Digital Outputs    The Alarm Output is available when Relay 1 on the Controller is suitably  connected  for these connections refer to the IXP200 System Installation  Manual   Thi
24.    System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       period of time  minimum 2 digits  e g  20   2  seconds  that the Action must be active     Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or Cancel to reject new  data     NOTE  Changing to another panel before clicking on the Door Panels Apply  button  would result in the new entry being rejected     DELETING AN EXISTING DOOR  This operation must be done with the System on line     To Delete a Door  proceed as follows     1  Click on the Door icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu      2  In the top pane  select the required name to be deleted in the Name field   and then click Delete to remove data from System     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 39  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       NEXT   LIFT  ELEVATOR  CONTROL          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 40  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       LIFT  ELEVATOR  CONTROL    Any Door position may be allocated to the control of lifts  elevators   In the  panel below  Door 2 has been allocated     NOTE   Only one of the sixteen System Doors may be configured for lifts   elevators      lol    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help             Door   Read
25.    The encoding setting is case sensitive and should be entered exactly as shown  above  Do not leave any white spaces after the text   NOTE  7he name    Interbase    in the above key will be retained even though the   database used is now Firebird     The    graphics properties    file has the same value for the database location and  encoding as the    proxette properties    file  and is synchronised with     proxette  properties    when logging on to IXP200     Graphics  database interbase url    jbdc   firebird sql    localhost c  1 XP200 database proxette fdb  Graphics  database  interbase encoding ISO8859_1   Error Setting      proxette log    file for Trouble Shooting  proxette error  redirecttofile  true    By default  to ensure that error messages can be reviewed  the key    redirecttofile     is set true in order to log error messages to the    proxette log    file  This file will be  located in  XP200 log folder  named by date  e g     proxette20040914 log        A new file is created each time IXP200 is executed  In case of execution errors   take a copy of this file to send to your dealer to assist in the analysis and resolution  of errors           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  12  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Device Setting    This is usually set in the Controller Panel or Configuration System Menu of IXP200  but can be set manually by editing the  proxette  properties    file as follows       1  Specify
26.   1  If a previous version of IXP200 is installed  uninstall it     2  Install IXP200 V6 0 to C  IXP200   or to the folder where IXP200 is to be  installed  if different   and follow the sequence listed under Installation  Procedure   Single  Host  PC     3  Run UpgradeDatabase to upgrade an existing Database     4  Firebird Server is not required to run on the Host anymore  and can be  stopped           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     On the Database Server PC     1  Install Firebird Server by running setup exe from the Firebird folder on the  IXP200 CD  Ensure that it runs automatically as a service  and that it has  started      2  Create a shared folder  called  for example  Access   and create a Database  sub folder inside it      3  Assuming the folder Access is off the root directory  the path to the Database  should be C  Access  Database     NOTE  7he shared folder must be accessible by the user at the Host PC      4  Copy the Database  proxette fdb  from the Host to the Database folder on the  Server  After this  it would be wise to rename the database file on the Host so  as not to select it by mistake  IXP200 keeps a pick list of previously selected  databases in the Log in dialog      5  You would probably want to install IBConsole on the Server as well  This can  be copied from the Host Tools folder     On the Host PC     1  Start IXP200  The log in screen will appear  see n
27.   2  Click New     3  The New Reason Code dialog shown on the next page will be displayed    4  Enter the required code and its text description in the dialog      5  Click Apply to accept the code and close the dialog  or Cancel to reject  the code and close the dialog           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 121  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 10   Reason Codes        6  Add more Reason Codes as required      7  Click Apply on the Reason Codes Panel to save all changes  or Cancel to  reject them     veu esson code SNS     Reason Code J  Reason Text      ARTE    New Reason Code dialog         To Edit an Existing Reason Code     1  Double click the row to be edited and change the text description in the  Edit Reason dialog box displayed     x    Reason Code Po  Reason Text  Business visit    AA    Edit Reason Dialog          2  Click on Apply on the Edit Reason Dialog to save any changes  or on  Cancel to reject them      3  Click Apply on the Reason Codes Panel to save all changes  or on  Cancel to reject them           END OF CHAPTER                June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 122  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 11   Card Design       CHAPTER 11   CARD DESIGN    INTRODUCTION    This Software permits the System user to design templates for the printing of  data concerning a Tagholder on
28.   7  Click Ok to accept the new Action parameter data into the System  or  Cancel to reject new data or refresh existing data  This will close the dialog  box     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 70  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions        Aroa      isix    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help            Switch off Ovens             PERIOD OF OPERATION   i       Days of Week  Start Time  hh mm  Fo Po    Joe fp ef O EN EN  mo Er       MONITORED INPUT S  AND STATE     Select Input  Oven 180 v  Select State  closed   O19  Channel No Name                ACTION  Select Action Type  Relay p   Parameters    Transactions   Alarms l    Seq   Date Time Terminal Event Name Tag                  Polling started Obs     com    Sample Configured Event Triggered Action Panel     8  In the Event Triggered Action Window  click Apply to accept the new or  edited data into the System  or Cancel to reject new data or refresh  existing data     NOTE  Failure to click Apply after adding a new Event Triggered Action or  editing an existing one would result in the data being lost   Editing an Existing Event Triggered Action    To Edit an Event Triggered Action  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Action icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  drop down menu     2  Choose the Event Triggered Actions tab      
29.   A Define Message Action Dialog similar to that shown below will be    displayed  Click on the arrow icon and select the required message to  be displayed from the dropdown list     E  Define Message Action 3 xj    Display Message            at Controller    ARE    Define Message Action Dialog       Define Relay Action Dialog similar to that shown below is displayed   Select the Relay to be triggered and enter the duration you want it to be active     If feedback from an Input is required  select the Input and the state  which  should stop the Relay activation     E Define Relay Action   x   Call Relay  Oven pre heat E   for Duration 60000 0 18  OR until Input Oven 180  rl       has State  closed y                 Define Relay Action Dialog   Oven Relay Selected       Define Relay Action           Call Relay  for Duration  OR until Input    has State             Define Relay Action Dialog          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 66  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       Relay Action Configuration    If a Relay Action is selected  the combo box will display all the relay outputs  allocated under the related Output Terminal configuration  as shown above     Call Relay   Displays the relay that must be triggered    For Duration   Displays the period of time for the Relay Action    Or until Input i Displays the input that supplies the feedback    Has stat
30.   Anti Tamper Yes 2003 06 13   15 17 51  SYSDBA    2003 06 13   09 46 26   LabIn  4    AntiTamper   Yes      2003613   15 17 51  SYSDBA  2003 06 25   11 07 25 Lifts  09  Anti Tamper No Date N A   Time N A   Return to the Web Reports Main page  Ml  le        EE Local intranet    Typical Alarm Report    An Alarm Report displays the details of all alarms that were activated during the  specified time period     A sample Alarm Report is shown  The Date filter has been selected in this  example  Selecting the Date from or Date to option causes a drop down  calendar to be displayed  as described previously under Access Reports      If no filter is selected  the date defaults to the current date  and the time period  to 00 00 to 23 59 59     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  30  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Status Report    3    Status Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer       Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      a   Qsearch CFavortes media C4   BD So    Address  E  http  localhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports  StatusReport ha  Go   Links a  2  Status Report                    l              Submit Export Report  CSV                   Date from 2003 06 02 Fs  to  2003 07 31 Es   Daily Time from   00 00 00 to  23 59 59  24 Hour Clock     Date Filter   2003 06 02 to 2003 07 31  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59             Return to the Web Repor
31.   FIRMWARE  UPGRADING   cuca nia bs ra E 6  Unit TYPE save vin innate vidi Avian eaves 7  Upgrade  Percocet 7  A A TAA AANT 7  A AN 7  All units  one at a time       nnnnnnnnninnnnnnnnnnnnacannn aran n nr naa nano naar n nono rr n naa rara naanns 7  Other Information oo    eee 7  Controller ocn adas all rta iii 7  Terminal  Acond die 7  Force Upgrade aperar mien nn A este rss oe  ARLEN eg ores on a vet ee 7  SYSTEM TOOLS rt nt ln ans reviennent antenne 8  PING  St  TR ite iieitdas 8  COMMS TEST A nee na Pape aaa a rite ne desde anne 8  NO OT CVCIRS vaciar Esterel and test fiat T 9  UNICA cana nada 9  A E EN NN 9  MISCELLANEOUS  FACILITIES  reirante nini idad ana 9  Setting the Logical Address of the Controller or a Terminal    10  Set Default Messer adn 10  Configure Controller Port 2    10  Clearing the Controller memory    10  CHAPTER 3   CSV IMPORTER UTILITY          aa 11  GENERA ida T aaa ld 11  DEFUNITIONS casarnos aia alioli rabia dead 12  REQUIRED ESV FORMA Titans do 13  PROGRAM OPERATION  ocacion fan ia 14  INDEX  a ato 15     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 1    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   System Utilities             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 2  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 1   Database Upgrade Utility       SECTION 5   UTILITIES    INTRODUCTION    The IXP System provides software utilities to assist with tas
32.   Seq Date Time Terminal Event Name Tag             DB    com  Input   Output Terminals Panel   Lift  elevator  Control Example    Input  Output Terminals Panel Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of the information that is displayed in the  Input Output Panel s fields and what the buttons functions are     10 Terminal   The Logical Address of the currently selected  Input or Output Terminal  Click to show the  dropdown list of the other detected Terminals     NOTE  Once a Terminal has been allocated a name in the Name field  this  name will be displayed together with the Terminal s Logical Address in  the 10 Terminal field    Search   This button searches the Terminal Table for  any Input or Output Terminal  and fills in the  dropdown list of 10 Terminals    Terminal Setting    Name   The name of the Terminal           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 58  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals       End of Line  Input    Enable or disable an End of Line resistor    Terminal Only    Usage  Output Termi    Used for either Lift  elevator  Control or for   nal only  Normal Output e g  switch off lights as part of  Building Management    Duration   Duration for lift  elevator  button activation  in  seconds    Channel Setting   Named Input or Output channels    Delete   Allows the 1 0 Device to be deleted    Apply   This button accepts the new data into t
33.   Tag types  Some Terminals have interfaces to connect to input  devices for these types      g  Personal Access Code  PAC    h  Mifare  13 96 MHz  Tags    i  Felica  13 96 MHz  Tags     NOTE  7he standard Impro 281 kHz and 125 kHz Tags are not compatible  with this System  Contact your distributor for details     Tag Levels   Each Tag must be allocated one of the following levels in the IXP200 System    Visitor   for persons requiring temporary access   Normal   typically used for employees   Supervisor   can arm disarm alarm System  acknowledge    alarms  and has APB Over ride     has Supervisor level access plus manual System  configuration ability  Has access to doors in No  Entry Mode     Administrator    Modes    The System can operate in one of two modes  namely Power Control Mode or  Alarm Arming Mode  depending on the hard wiring of the IXP200 Controller in  the System  as well as on the System Software configuration of the IXP200  Controller   For System interconnection information  refer to the IXP200  Hardware Installation Manual      Power Control    The Power Control Mode is available when Relay 2 on the  XP200 Controller is  suitably connected  When the System is in this Mode the following apply       1  When the first person enters an empty APB  Anti Passback  Zone  the relay  that controls the power switches on immediately      2  The doors in the Zone must have APB selected  as the System counts the  number of people inside the Zone who are leaving the Zone 
34.   Tagholders  gt   Checked OK JH 01 12       Tl 4      Add Edit   0000   Walton      Add Edit   Suspend       Add Edit   Access Group     TL E      Add Edit   Access Group   03 Lab Staff       y  Access Group  Selected                Add Edit Access Group details  vsd       To from Settings Menu    To from Delete Menu       Options    All Tagholders            To from other Add Edit  Menus    To from other Add Edit  Menus          Options    All Access Groups                    gt   Store new data                           gt  Refresh old data      Y                Access Group Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 6 19    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       PIN Menu    This menu permits the allocation of a PIN number to the selected Tagholder  or    the modification of an existing PIN number                lt   Tagholders  gt     LT F5 4      Add Edit   0000   Walton      Add Edit   Suspend       Add Edit   PIN       Add Edit   PIN     kkkkk                   Add Edit Access Group details  vsd       To from Settings Menu    To from Delete Menu       Options    All Tagholders       To from other Add Edit  Menus    To from other Add Edit  Menus       Options    00000 65535          Store new data             Refresh old data     Y                   PIN Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 6   20    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       
35.   To add a new Department  click Add       Edit Department List    xj            Department                         Edit Department List dialog     2  Type in a new department name    3  Click Apply to accept the changes  OR     4  Click Cancel to reject them     Editing a Department Name     1  To edit a Department name  highlight the name by selecting it      2  Click the Edit Icon  Make the required changes  and then         June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  98  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        3  Click Apply to accept the changes  OR   4  Click Cancel to reject them      5  Click the Cancel button or the cross in the top right corner to Exit     IMPORTANT NOTE      At this stage  if it is not required that the Tag number appear on the card  the  card may be printed using the following sequence       a  Print on a blank credit card Tag for a Tagholder before allocating the Tag to  him  that is  before entering his Tag number into the System    b  Read in the card number and allocate it to the Tagholder after printing it     This sequence is important as it avoids mismatching the Tag code with the  Tagholder details  Secondly  it ensures better print quality as the cards are not  handled before printing  The printing procedure is described below under the  heading Card Printing     NOTE   Printing on used credit card Tags is not recommended as dirt or grease  
36.   Transactions Options    No No    CEN aK Clear All                                                                                                     Option Selected Option Selected    No   Clear All   Transactions  Cleared   tlre 4  Store new    data  00   Refresh  old data Refresh old data   Transaction menu vsd   Transactions Menu     June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   24    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       PC Comms Menu  The PC Comms menu permits the selection of RS232 or RS485 communications  on the Host Bus between the Controller and the PC                lt   Settings  gt   To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus    To from other Settings  Menus       Options    RS485  RS232                   Option Selected ere                       Refresh old data      Y    PC Comms menu vsd                      PC Comms Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 25  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Reset System Menu  This menu permits resetting of the system           System Off line la              lt   Settings  gt          To from other  Settings Menus       To from other  Settings Menus         Reset System Options    No No    EEN V Reset System              y  Option Selected Option Selected    No   Reset System                         Reset System                                                                   Store ne
37.   and unlocks all  doors  If a button connected to a Controller initiates this Action  the button  must be placed in a glass fronted box for emergency use only  see the   XP200  System Hardware Installation Manual for wiring details      Alarm armed  A third party Alarm System can be linked to the IXP200 so that it can be  armed or disarmed at an   XP200 unit     In addition it is possible to set doors controlled by the IXP200 System into an  Armed Mode during the time that the Alarm System is armed  This Armed  Mode overrides any existing Door Mode that is less restrictive than Supervisor  Unlock Mode     During Armed Mode  only valid Supervisor or Administrator level Tags may  gain access to an armed door and enter the building  All other Tags are barred  from access at an armed door  Furthermore the Supervisor and Administrator  level Tags must also have been allocated access to the door in the usual  manner via an Access Group     A door that can be armed is one that is designated as such in the Door  Configuration setup  Usually only external doors are so designated           DOOR MODE COMPATIBILITY    Only certain Mode options are compatible with the various Door Modes     The restrictions on the use of the 8 programmable Door Modes with the Mode  options are shown in the table    COMPATIBLE DOOR MODES AND  OPTIONS        NOTE  These restrictions are not apparent from the Door Mode Pattern setup  information  For example  refer to the table   in Locked Mode   PIN  and o
38.   in minutes  after a Tag has exited an APB Zone  before it will  be allowed to enter the Zone again     Mifare Readers    Ideally  for a System using Mifare Readers  Auto ID should not be done until the  Mifare Readers have been enabled during System Configuration  see  Controller Configuration   Enabling the Mifare Readers disables ImproX PT  or TA Terminals  which cannot read Mifare Tags  in the System  allowing up to  32 Mifare Readers to be assigned     The Mifare Readers connect into the System through either ImproX PT or TA  Terminals     Controller Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of the information that is displayed in the Controller  Panel s fields and the functions of the buttons      Controller Port   The PC port to connect to the Controller or  to a ProxPal Reader or ImproX USB       Registration Reader       NOTE D     ProxPal  Registration   Yes must be selected here if an ImproX  Reader Enabled ProxPal Desktop Tag Reader or ImproX USB     Registration Reader    is installed  No must  be selected if neither of these is installed        NOTE 1    Enable Mifare Readers   When selected  this enables Mifare Readers  in the System    Mode  Optional    This selects Power Control or Alarm Arming  Mode for Relay 2  if used    APB Lockout Delay   Restricts the same Tag from entering at the    minutes  same point within a set period    Site Communication   As encryption is not implemented in this   Seed  O no encryption  version  a zero  0  must be ente
39.   which  in the case of IXP200 is the Host PC     The System needs an address for each unit in order to operate correctly  and  therefore the IP address is essential     VIRTUAL NETWORK ADAPTER  As the small IXP200 is a small Access Control System which is not network     based  it is necessary to setup a Virtual Private Network so that an IP address  can be acquired     The Windows help files have the following instructions    Computer which has a Modem Card installed as well as a Network  Card   To set up a Dial Up Networking connection to your corporate network     1  Double click My Computer  double click Dial Up Networking  and then  click Make New Connection  If it is your first Dial Up Networking  connection  you will be prompted automatically      2  In Select a Device  click Microsoft VPN Adapter  and then click Next      3  In Host name or IP Address  type the name or IP address of the virtual  private networking server for the network to which you want to connect      4  For example  type   pptpserver mycompany com  or  172 16 48 1   5  Click Next  and then click Finish     For Computers which have a network card but no server     Such as on a peer to peer network using Windows as the network system            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 4  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Assigning automatic private IP addresses for a simple network    With Wi
40.  153440  f Zoe 2 Jarras Nigel Hana   DOOM  14354  William Newton   200 06 11 144248 iy  Retuen to the Web Reports Main page    A  e   LA  Ge           Zone Occupancy Report    This Report provides information about the Tagholders in a specified Zone at  the time the Report is generated  with the time of entry into the Zone     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice Page 4  36    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Hours worked in APB Zone Time Sheet Report    suso ZOFEA  eue qui e201 5     l    t  k  N  k         Housy F  S BULL SUOZ dY U  P  HOM sunoH      gay ul patos sinon     oozaxr i   Ye oozaro fE   ssaa yomo qu    Y           a     weasel  ZIJE ITG       a2ed uwy spoday qa pA ayy 01 umgay                      1 T ump y MO panong PEDTST ez ZO 9002     I up UIPIMOTY FESOST TTITO 2007  I ump y S mo pnoy ELTISHI TUTO S007  l T Uy UPIMOTY TOT ZUTA 900Z pore oqwa L  Moseay  moz TL mag MIL aa ON dary AMEN                               PZ ZO 900Z 03 10 20 9003   1004 838    9Z   1 00   SAUOZ HAY WA POHOM SMOH  ESLZOO    UPSILTANDISO T  ALO AA I SMOH    Y   4u0 Leung    E ruzon  203  7 Lovza anoz    wos aye Y  E MENTON oque      UOS 19J VAF    a2ed urea spoday gaya ayy 07 Una          ago  vodey podxg    10d9Yj SI9UOZ JA V Ul poyo SNOT        yuiqns               n     09 a       odays sunoy s odasqgam qam zxdi osdu  3au 48 448s sy4oda gam ysouyjes0    day B   ssauppy          EEE       deH S001 
41.  3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration             Supervisor Unlock Mode   All doors can have this mode allocated to them  This ensures that normal  Tagholders cannot enter until the supervisor has unlocked the door  The door  then effectively reverts to Tag mode     No Entry Mode  This Mode is similar to Locked Mode  except     e Only Administrator Tagholders with valid access may enter   e All Tagholders with valid access can exit     e The RTE  exit  push button function allows any Tagholder still inside to  Exit the controlled area     e The RTE  enter  function is not operational therefore no person can gain  access in this way     WARNING   THIS LOCKED MODE CAN BE LIFE   THREATENING  IF THERE IS NO  TELEPHONE IN THE AREA WHERE THE PERSON IS LOCKED IN  AS  ONLY THE ADMINISTRATOR CAN OPEN THE DOOR BY CHANGING  THE DOOR MODE PATTERN OF THE LOCKED DOOR VIA THE  SOFTWARE     Locked Mode   e No Tagholders  even Administrator Tagholders  can enter    e The request to enter exit  RTE  does not work for either Entry or Exit   e All Tagholders still inside cannot Exit the controlled area     e Any attempt to Enter or Exit the controlled area would result in a  Transaction being recorded     MODE OPTIONS    The Mode options which can be selected together with one of the 8  programmable Door Modes to form additional Modes are      e  PIN Number   e  Reason   e  Dual Tag   e Record Transaction  e Denied Alarm   e LED      PIN Number  with Tag  Mode  e This System 
42.  Access Groups Panel          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 84  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups       No    Access Pattern number  The System allocates a  number when a new entry is required    Days   Days of the week when the Access Pattern is active    Start Time   Starting time of the Access Pattern  hh mm     Duration   Duration of the Access Pattern from the Start Time    Doors   Doors allowed for the Access Pattern    Floors   Floors allowed for the Access Pattern    Add E Allows a new Access Pattern to be created for the  Access Group    Delete   Removes the selected Access Pattern from the Access  Group    Apply   Accepts the new or edited Access Group entry into  the System database    Cancel   Cancels the new entry or refreshes the existing entry     only if the Apply button has not already been clicked     CONFI GURI NG AN ACCESS GROUP   PROCEDURE          IMPORTANT NOTE    There are four stages in the Access Group Configuration procedure      Add a new Access Group name    Add a new Access Pattern  Day and Time  Door and Floor    Add more Access Patterns  optional     Save the whole Group and its Patterns        These stages are described below  Each stage must be completed to define an  Access Group     Naming an Access Group   Procedure    To name an Access Group  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Access Groups icon on the toolbar or select from
43.  Arturo Fettucini Admin Main Door  APB Override In  208038350421     6   2003 06 13   10 36 17 Arturo Fettucini Admin Main Door  APB Override In  208038350421  22   2003 06 25   15 01 52 Arturo Fettucini Admin RearDoorIn  AllowedIn  208038350421  Return to the Web Reports Main page  ES      EE Local intranet       Access Report with only Main Filters  Date and Person  selected    Date Filter    Selecting the Date Filter  Date from or Date to  will cause a drop down calendar  such as that shown next to be displayed     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 25  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports           2003 07 17 E  to  2003 07 17      AE  24 Hour    Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat                            Drop down Calendar    The Date Filter default is the current date     Select the month and year required  if necessary  by using the arrow icons   The  single arrows change the month  the double arrows change the year      Lastly  select the day of the month required   this will close the calendar and  transfer the selected date to the text box     Time Filter    Using the Time Filter alone results in the Report including access information  only for the time period defined  and on the current date     The Time Filter default is 00 00 00 to 23 59 59     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  26  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12    
44.  Date   After the selection is made from the calendar   the month and date is displayed here    End Date   After the selection is made from the calendar   the month and date is displayed here    Down Arrow Icon   Displays the calendar    Apply button   Accepts the new or edited holiday    Cancel button   Rejects the data and closes the panel      1  In the Name field  type in the name of the holiday    2  For a single day holiday  proceed as follows     a  In the Start Date field click on the arrow icon to view the calendar      b  Select the Month dropdown menu by clicking on the arrow icon and  then select the required Month  and then click on the required Date in  the grid                          Date Dialog     c  In the End Date field click on the arrow icon to view the calendar           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 115  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 8   Holidays        d  Select the Month dropdown menu by clicking on the arrow icon and   then select the same Month as before  and then click on the same  Date as before in the grid     3  Click Apply to accept the new data or Cancel to reject data     4  For a multiple day holiday  proceed with the above procedure  except in the   End Date field select the last day of the holiday    Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or click Cancel to   reject new data or refresh existing data    NOTE  Changing to another p
45.  Display  Tools    Control Panel Options Programs    Add Remove Hardware oF  Cal Installs  removes  and troubleshoots hardware  amp     Installs  removes  and troubleshoots  hardware Fax Folder Options Fonts Gaming InterBase Internet  Options Manager Options          Java Plug in Keyboard Mail Mouse Networkand Phone and  Lai Dial up Co    Modem                   Windows Update    Windows 2000 Support se 4 DR  L  amp  2        3 9    de    Power Options Printers Regional Scanners and Scheduled Sounds and  Options Cameras Tasks Multimedia    System Users and VirusScan  Passwords        Installs  removes  and troubleshoots hardware       Control Panel     2  Select Add Remove Hardware  The Add Remove Hardware Wizard  will be displayed     Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Welcome to the Add Remove  Hardware Wizard             This wizard helps you add  remove  unplug  and  troubleshoot your hardware     To continue  click Next         lt  Back        Add  Remove Hardware Wizard   3  Click Next  The Choose a Hardware Task Screen will be displayed    4  Select Add  Troubleshoot and click Next           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 7  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information          Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Choose a Hardware Task   S  Which hardware task do you want to perform  SS    Select the hardware task you want to perform  and then click Next        C Uninstall Unplug
46.  Door Status Polling  Parameters      See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 15  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       Building Graphics Software    If the System uses the Building Graphics facility  a screen similar to that shown  below will appear as the Main Application Window            IXP200 E   5  x     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help       Esperanza         mts  E  a   a      E    Transactions   Alarms   Door Status               I  Soe  O com  Main application window with Building Graphics    Use the Ai  Home  Icon to return to the Base Plan     Use the       Key  Icon to display the Base Plan in a small window at the  left of the current panel  with an indicator pointing to the  location of the current plan on the Base Plan     The Graphics Software comprises two components  namely the Designer Module  and the Runtime Module     The Designer Module allows the user to develop various plans  and is described  in the Impro Graphics Designer Module manual     The Runtime Module allows the Graphics software to display plans derived using  the Graphics Designer Software Module  and to permit the monitoring and  control various System parameters by means of icons superimposed on the  plans           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 16  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12
47.  Doors have 8 programmable modes  These are  listed below in order of severity      a  Open Now Mode    Open Mode    Door Entry Code Mode   Personal Access Code Mode   Tag Mode    f  Supervisor Unlock Mode    g  No Entry Mode     h  Locked Mode      SEE THE NOTES ON DOOR MODE OPTIONS BOX  BELOW FOR DETAILS      Tagholder s PIN may be required with the Tag on  entry or exit     Reason code may be required on entry or exit   Two Tags may be required for access   Recording of allowed Transactions may be selected     Invalid Tags can generate an alarm when presented  at an armed door     The normal state of the Reader LED during this time  slot     This button accepts the new entry into the System     This button removes any new data from the fields  and refreshes the original data     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 48  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration             NOTES ON DOOR MODE OPTIONS  THE DOOR MODE OPTIONS ARE DESCRIBED IN THESE NOTES     There are 8 programmable Door Modes  Each of these can be  modified to form other Modes by the selection of Mode options  within the Door Mode Patterns  Notes on these 8 Modes are provided  below     Open Now Mode    The door unlocks immediately at the start of the time slot  and remains  open until the end of the time slot  All Terminals in the same Zone as this  Reader which are in Open Now Mode  wil
48.  Folder  10   Installation Wizard  10  11   Interbase  12    InterBase Guardian  8  InterBase Server  9  InterClient  8  9  InterServer  8   IP address  17   locale  10  11   minimum requirements  7  Multiple Databases  13  new installation  10  12  operating system  9  11  Password  17  18  19  previous installation  10  proxette  7  8  10  11  12  13  ProxPal  10  13   serial port  10  11  13  setup files  8  9   uninstall  8  10  Username  17          END OF SECTION          USER S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page    2     20    USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  21  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     USER   S NOTES                         wee  Custman    XP200  English Manuals   IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 ixp200  sys swm en 12 Section 2 doc     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  22    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12          XP200 Software User  Manual  SECTION 3  CONFI GURATI ON  PART A   Chapters 1 to 5     Section 3   System Configuration       SECTION 3 PART A   SYSTEM CONFI GURATION       CONTENTS   CHAPTER 1    INTRODUCTION sucia en eee 5  GENERAL ariete Queena at een   s ne DOS APN ado 5  Manual Editing Facility            cee cece ee rere narrar 6  IXP200 Toolbar Icons    6  Typical Floor Plan and Block Diagram                                   
49.  Host on the Server  but not the    Restore function  The Backup function is modified so that it only creates a backup  file of the type   fbk if the database is installed on a separate Server     Restore    The user can manually restore the   fbk file at the Server using Firebird utilities   In  the normal case  where the database is installed on single Local Host PC  the  Backup facility performs the Backup and Restore functions as usual       1  To do backup from the Host at the Server  first map a network drive to the  shared folder on the Server  for example  R  is mapped to   MyServer Access       2  In the Backup Dialog in IXP200  set the Backup path by browsing to the  mapped drive and selecting the database folder  for example  R  Database      3  Click Backup Now to test this function  This should create a backup file   fbk  in the R  Database folder  name according to the date it is created     GETTING STARTED    Upgrading an Existing I XP200 Database    A utility called UpgradeDatabase is provided to upgrade the database automatically   This must be done whenever the Software is upgraded and before starting IXP200   Please refer to the file    UpgradeReadme  rtf    for detailed instructions     Communications  Controller to Host PC     There are three possible ways to connect the Host PC to the Controller            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  15  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Option 1   Directly via Seria
50.  Output Relay for a specified period of time or as  determined by feedback from an Input     Example 1  Tea Time Siren sounds at 10 a m  for 30 seconds     Example 2  Relay to open a roller shutter door operated at 7 a m  for  2 minutes or until the limit switch Input indicates that  the door is fully open    b  Message   Sends a message to the IXP200 Controller   s LCD  At a later    stage in development the message will be able to be displayed on an  electronic notice board     NOTE  Actions can only be configured if at least one Output unit has been    detected and has been allocated to Normal use  as opposed to Lift   elevator  Control      See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  63  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions        isix    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help       Time Triggered Action 1 Switch board to night service  see       oe te    Switch board to night service         Switch board to day service       TIME OF OPERATION        Days of Week        sun    mon     que     wea   Cm  Def sat   tal   Trigger Time  htm    17 foo     ACTION  Select Action Type  Relay   e Parameters               Transactions   Alarms  l    D Date   Time Terminal Event   Name Tag             os  com        Polling started    Tab Panel    Time Triggered Actions    A Time Triggered Action will take place on specific 
51.  Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION CONFIGURATION    SP200  10  x   File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help       Time Triggered Actions Event Triggered Actions       Event Triggered Action 6  Switch off Ovens 7   Switch off Ovens             PERIOD OF OPERATION           Days of Week  Start Time  hhmm  fo Po    E oF Fe E E   Eh    MONITORED INPUT S  AND STATE     Select Input Emerg generator v  Select State  Open hd Ie              Channel No PE    Oven 180 Open    ACTION  Select Action Type  Relay bd   Parameters    Transactions   Alarms    Date           Ove  0 com  Event Triggered Action Tab Panel       Event Triggered Actions Tab   Event Triggered Actionn    Shows currently selected Action n  Combo  box navigates to the required Action record    Name   Name of current Event Triggered Action    Delete   Removes the currently selected entry    New   Adds a new entry where Actions Events can  be configured    PERIOD OF OPERATION   Days of Week   Mon    The days that an Event must be monitored    Tues  etc    Start Time   The time of day to start monitoring an Event    Duration   The length of the monitoring period       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  68    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       MONITORED I NPUT S  AND STATE    Select Input Allows selecti
52.  Section 4   Reports       Location Filter  NOTE  The term Location in this context means the same as Door     Select any required Location from the drop down combo box  The report will  reflect all transaction information for the default time period on the current date  for that Location only     If a report is required on all Locations  leave the Location field blank   Click Submit to process the request                 lala    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea    Back    gt      A   Qsearch  Favorites Bristory   Es  Sp     Address  E  http  flocalhostiwebreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports AccessReport      Go    Links               to       Daily Time from   00 00 00 23 59 59  Person S    Location   Main Door      Other Filters       24 Hour Clock          F Department   M Tag No    F Event Type  I Reason Code          Date Filter   2003 05 05 to 2003 07 17  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59  Location Filter   Main Door                                             No  Date   Time Name Department Location Event   Tag No  Reason   6  2003 06 11   14 34 45 John Walton Laboratory Mein  Denied Tag Expired  208038347205     7  2003 06 11   14 34 52 Clara Calisto Admin Mein  Denied Teg Expired  208038354551   3  2003 06 11   14 34 56 James Nigel Haines pa AllowedIn  208038343237   10  2003 06 11   14 35 10 Clara Calisto Admin wes Pane rase 208038354551   11 2003 06 11   1435 45 Clara Calisto Admin Lt pane nee Expired  208038354551   12  2003 06 11   1435 47 James 
53.  Tags    108  Saving the Tagholder Record    108  Printing onto Adhesive Labels    108  Cards printed from some other PC    108  Printing Procedure   Batch Printing    108  Editing an Existing Tagholder      oooconnnnncncccconnnconocrannann rr nn narra nnnn nano 110  Deleting an Existing Tag   coooonicoccnononnicnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnr nr rnrnrnnnnnrn 112  CHAPTER 8   HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION    113  lada add 113  Holiday Panel Fields and Buttons    ooooniociccccnonnnicoonanann nn nnnnnrnnnnnnnn nano 114  Configuring Holidays   Procedure    114  New Holiday Dialog                                                       narran 115  Editing an Existing Holiday    116  Deleting an Existing Holiday        ooonnnnnnnninncccnnnninnonacnnnrarnn nn narra rana nano 116  CHAPTER 9   MESSAGES CONFIGURATION  0occccccccocnonnnnnnonnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnns 117  Ol ica 117  Message Panel Fields and Buttons    ooonnniccccncnccicionanonanonnnnnnnnnannnn nano 117  Adding New Messages   cooocooccccccccocconannononnnnnnn naar corn n rn rnrnnnnnnn nr nrrnnnns 118  Editing an Existing Message   cooooocociccccocononannnnnnnnnnnnnnn corn rre rarnanannnnrnr 119  Deleting an Existing Message   0ooocococccoccoononcnnnnnnonnnnnan cn nn cnn rannannnnn nan 119  CHAPTER 10   REASON CODES CONFIGURATION    121  lui od 121  Reason Codes Panel and Buttons                                                    121  To Add a Reason Code    121  To Edit an Existing Reason Code   ooooonooccccncccccnonannnnnnnncnnnnnnn
54.  Terminal when his Tag is presented  Time or Event Triggered Actions can also  initiate these Messages  that are displayed on the Controller LCD     Anz BEES    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help               Closing at 3 pm on Friday          _9      _seg   Date   Time Terminal Event   Name        e    Message Panel       Message Panel Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of all the fields associated with the Message Panel   the information displayed in the fields and what the button   s functions are        No    The System allocates a number when a new Message  entered      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 117    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 9   Messages       Message Text   Displays all the Messages that are stored in the Systems  database    Add   Allows you to add a new Message into the System    Delete   This button removes the selected entry in the pane  above    Apply   This button accepts the new data into the System  database    Cancel   This button rejects any new or edited entries     Adding New Messages    To add new Messages  proceed as follows       1  Click on Configuration on the toolbar and select Messages from the  dropdown menu  The Messages Panel similar to that shown above is  displayed      2  Click Add  The New Message Dialog similar to that shown below is  displayed     Duration   10  s   Mode   Normal       
55.  Trent   TagNo   R   6T  2003 067 13    Arturo Fettucini Allowed In 208038350421   62 2003 06 13 44  Arturo Fettucini Admin i APB Override In  208038350421   eo 2003 06 13 49  Arturo Fettucini Admin i APB Override In   203038350421  Fa  EJ                   2003 06 13   09 51  Arturo Fettucini Admin i APB Override In  208038350421  2003 06 13   10 36  Arturo Fettucini Admin i APB Override In  208038350421                                  Return to the Web Reports Main page       Access Report with Multiple Filtering    See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  29    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Alarm Report           Alarm Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer       File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      a   Qsearch    gFavorites media  4   BD So    Address El http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports AlarmReport ha   o Links al                   Alarm Report    Subrnit Export Report  CSV             Return to the Web Reports Main page    Date from 2003 06 02 Fs  to  2003 07 30 Es   Daily Time from   00 00 00 to  23 59 59  24 Hour Clock     Date Filter   2003 06 02 to 2003 07 30  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59                                              Date Time Source Event Tag Holder Acknowledged  AckDate   Ack Time   Ack By  2003 06 06   14 31 27  00  Tables Initialised Yes 2003 06 13   15 17 51  SYSDBA    2003 06 07   16 36 07 Lifts  09
56.  a device  Choose this option to uninstall a device or to prepare the computer to unplug a  device      lt  Back Cancel          Choose a Hardware Task Screen     5  The System will search the Hardware list  New Hardware Detection  Screen displayed      Add Remove Hardware Wizard       New Hardware Detection NS  The wizard automatically locates new Plug and Play hardware  RS    el       Windows is searching for new Plug and Play hardware to install   Searching             New Hardware Detection Screen     6  On the Choose a Hardware Device Screen which is then displayed  click  Add a new device and then click Next           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Add Remove Hardware Wizard       Choose a Hardware Device D   Which hardware device do you want to troubleshoot  SS    The following hardware is already installed on your computer  If you are having problems  with one of these devices  select the device  and then click Next     If you are attempting to add a device and it is not shown below  select Add a new  device  and then click Next           Bl Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter   2 ACPI Fixed Feature Button   al Programmable interrupt controller   E System timer   E Direct memory access controller   F   Standard 101 102 Keu nr Miermsoft Natural PS 42 Keuhnard         Coe       Choose a Hardware Device Screen
57.  any indirect  incidental  consequential  special  or exemplary damages or lost profits  even if Licenser    has been advised of the possibility of such damages     7  HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES   The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed   manufactured or intended for use or resale as on line  control equipment in hazardous environments requiring  ail safe performance  such as in the operation of  nuclear facilities  aircraft navigation or communication  Systems  air traffic control  direct life support  machines  or weapons Systems  in which the failure of  he Software could lead directly to death  personal  injury  or severe physical or environmental damage      High Risk Activities      Impro and its suppliers  specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of  fitness for High Risk Activities     TRADEMARKS    ImproX  ImproNet  IXP  and other names included  therein are trademarks of Licensor  No right  License  or interest to Licensor trademarks are generated  hereunder  and you agree that no such right  License  or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to  such trademarks     8  GOVERNING LAW  This License Agreement shall be construed and  governed in accordance with the laws of Republic of  South Africa     9  COSTS OF LITIGATION  If any action is brought by either party to this License  Agreement against the other party regarding the  subject matter hereof  the prevailing party shall be  entitled to recover  in addition to any other relief  gra
58.  case the required Tagholder is selected in the Add  Edit menu  The  subsequent menus permit the modification of various Tag related information              Add Edit     0000  Options    Walton All Tagholders  CF5 d    Add  Edit Screen  This screen appears when accessing any of the Tagholder sub menus  It  allows     a  The selection of any Tagholder by name    b  Entry of a new Tagholders    name after presenting a new Tag to the  Controller           See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 15  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Suspend Menu    This menu permits the Administrator to suspend access permission for the  selected Tagholder and to re instate this permission as required                 lt   Tagholders  gt   To from Settings Menu    To from Delete Menu         Add Edit  A  0000  Options    Walton All Tagholders         Add Edit   Suspend  To from other Add Edit  Menus         Add Edit Options      pee  ee Not Suspended  ot Suspende  hua Y   Suspended          Selected Option                      Store new data                   ___  Refresh old data       Add Edit Access Group details vsd    Suspend Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 16  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Name Menu    This menu permits the addition of a new Tagholder name or the editing of an  existing Tagholder name               lt   Taghol
59.  change  is to prevent the Microsoft Operating System from interfering and  making a copy of the gdb file each time a change is made  This slows  down the operation of the  XP200 Software too much  Backup is best  left under the control of the System administrator     Backup files have the extension gbk that is necessary to identify the file as a  backup  However the IXP200 backup process immediately restores the gbk file  to a valid database file so that it is ready for use   f the current database file  becomes corrupt  it can be deleted or renamed and the backup file can be  renamed to the original filename  e g  Proxette fdb  so that it is immediately  recognised by all the properties files     The restored backup files are named for the date  the time  and the original  database filename  e g  2003 10 01 140103Proxette fdb     BACKUPS  Scheduled Automatic Backup     1  Select Backup from the File Menu to schedule or execute a backup of the  database  The Backup dialog shown will be displayed           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  149  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 15   Database Backup       x                        Backup path  Database  ES                          Number of backups to keep in backup folder  8     Schedule    M Mon 01     oo     IV Tues  01     00     F Wed o1    foo   M Thurs at    foo     M Fri o1    00    Y sat ot    foo      Y Sun o1     00          
60.  de a a cera iaa ads 34  ZONE OCCUPANCY Report    si issssssssssssseseereeerreereennss 36  Hours worked in APB Zone Time Sheet Report    37  Department Time Sheet Report    39  GENERAL SYSTEM REPORTS iii 41  Holiday Reporta ns and A a aed vee ii een anda 41  June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 3    OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 4  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       REPORTS OVERVIEW  GENERAL    The IXP200 Software includes the facility to display and or print copies of  various Reports  These reports are presented as web pages  These reports fall  into four categories  namely Administrator Reports  Transaction Reports  Person  Information Reports and General System Reports     Administrator Reports cover Archives and System Configuration  The  Configuration information is only accessible to the database Administrator using  the correct log on name and password     Transaction Reports are available to any User  and cover access  alarm and  Terminal transactions     Person Information Reports are available to any User  and cover access patterns  and zone and APB occupancy for individual Tagholders     General System Reports are available to any User  and provide Holiday and  Reason Code status information     This section of this manual contains information about the type of Reports that  the u
61.  into the IXP200 Software and allows the  Graphics Software to display plans derived using the Graphics Designer  Software Module  and to permit the monitoring and control of various System  Parameters by means of icons superimposed on the plans     Refer to Section 3  Chapter 12 of this manual for further details of the use of  the Graphics Runtime Module        END OF SECTION                   June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 20  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 21  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       USER   S NOTES                   k  Custman    XP200           IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 system swm en 12 Section 1 doc     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 22    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12          XP200  Software User Manual  SECTION 2  SOFTWARE  INSTALLATION    SECTION 2   CONTENTS    INTRODUCTION cick ne Aachen Mae A ad AR ER aoe Baas 6  DATE TIME FORMATS isiin aiv tad eaaie lana lala da RUSA dia dd 6  NETWORK AND COMPUTER SECURITY  6  IXP200 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS  ccc 7   Installation procedure when using a single  Host  PC    7    INSTALLATION PROCEDURE WHEN SEPARATE DATABASE SERVER PC IS USED  13  OPERATIONAL DIFFERENCES WHEN USING A HOST AND A SE
62.  is then displayed in the box above the Camera icon     Look in  Mn WiInDows       A4W_DATA   All Users  Application Data  APPLOG  CATROOT    COMMAND x   File name    Open    Files of type  magec bmp   ing   ain y  Cancel      File Open Dialog        4  Photographs can be scaled and rotated  To do this  click on the picture or  the Camera icon once a photograph has been imported into the  Tagholder   s screen           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 95  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       Tag Holder  Ermintrude o Flaherty           General   Details   Tag   Operator                 First Name    Ermintrude   Last Name    O Flaherty   PIN used with tag  7  5 numbers   Company    Drimsoll Equipment m              Note                    Lo JLo   mio Je     Tagholder s photo edit options menu       In the menu that appears in the photograph box  select Edit     A dialog will be displayed  with menu choices as shown in the next illustration        Rotate  Resize  Mirror Horizontal  Mirror Vertical    Edit dialog  In the Edit dialog main menu bar   The File option permits the translation of the screen text  The Edit option    permits you to Undo any changes made before pressing OK   The Image option allows rotating and resizing of the image        O June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 96  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Sect
63.  of presenting the Tag    3  Exit within 30 seconds      4  The System attempts to arm and will arm 30 seconds later if the Alarm  Panel reports that it is armed      5  The Reader s LED then indicates Armed Mode  blinking Red       6  If the Alarm Panel is unable to arm at the first attempt  the System will  automatically retry every minute     When Armed     1  The Status LED of all armed door Readers indicates Armed Mode      2  Only valid Administrator Supervisor Tags can enter doors in Armed Mode   All other Tags are denied access  irrespective of the Access Group allocated  to them      3  Presenting a Supervisor or Administrator Tag at an armed door will  automatically disarm the Alarm System  but the Alarm System may further  require a password to be entered at its own panel to disarm it     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 15  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview           Access  Pattern          y       Up to 8 Access Patterns  define access conditions in  an Access Group                      Security  Levels    Only one Access Group can be  allocated to each Tag          Y    One of two security levels   High or  Low  is allocated to each Access  Group                  The Door Mode restricts or relaxes  the basic access conditions defined  by the Access Group                 The Tag Level further restricts or  relaxes the access conditions      defined by the Access G
64.  paid by you are paid in consideration of the  icenses granted under this License Agreement     4  TERM   This License Agreement is effective upon your opening of  his package    5  LIMITED WARRANTY   Licensor warrants  for your benefit alone  that the program  diskettes in which the computer Software is embedded and  he user s manual shall  for a period of 90 days from the  date of commencement of this License Agreement  referred  o as the warranty period   be free from defects in material  and workmanship  Licensor further warrants  for our benefi  alone  that during the Warranty Period the Program shall  operate substantially in accordance with he functional  specifications in the User s Manual  You agree that the  oregoing constitutes your sole and exclusive remedy oi  breach by Licensor of any warranties made under this  Agreement  EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH  ABOVE  THE PROGRAM  AND THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED  THEREIN  ARE LICENSED    AS IS    AND LICENSOR  DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES  WHETHER  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING  WITHOUT LIMITATION  ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE     6  LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  Licensor   s cumulative liability to you or any other party for  any loss or damages resulting from any claims                          demands  or action arising out of or relating to this  Agreement shall not exceed the License fee paid for  he use of the Program  In no event shall Licenser be  iable for
65.  saquovey maA WPI al    4340 03 yausaquy oso    HOd3Y sau0z gdy U  PIANO AA sanoH   E          4 37    Page    Data subject to change without notice    June 2007 Impro Technologies    OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       The Hours Worked in APB Zone Time Sheet Report provides a report of the  hours that a specified Tagholder in all APB Zones between two dates     The following selections must be made before clicking Submit       1  The required date range must be selected  Selecting the Date from or  Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be displayed  as described  previously under Access Reports       2  The required Person must be selected from the Person combo box     The report can be exported in CSV format     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  38  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Department Time Sheet Report    ods joous aw  juaunedag    0260 FORME A  7u wuneda   4   of   vomi  gt  PEA   fast  pam ES      E          a2ed uwy spoday qe AA ayy 07 Way          Gr D ES    z 00 SONT ICE HI ZZIZO 9ODZ  GED 6b   p Z0 96    bib1   0 00 71 E0 Z0 9007 Taare JA  oque L                Gr D 91 92 00 Oz 60 S1 POPPI TL Z0 9007  GED Ev  L9 20 EA 11 00 21   0 Z0 9002 opeg Prg                             fn    4           NE n i z   FERON  IEI e        E       ueduro y       E   uone20T  A syauyedaq Aydurq PH y E   quaunredaq  Eois   Cs  UOS 19J   PAR   
66.  selecting    general    French  This means that the base  French text can be defined that works for any System with a French setup   regardless of the country it is in     If it then becomes necessary to change certain French text for a different  country  the changes can be made at a later stage by simply modifying the base  French text for the specific country without affecting the base French  translation     If this approach is not followed  then it may result in a lot more effort in the  long run  e g  if French France is selected and translated  then translation to  French any other country would have to be done from scratch  If base French  is defined  then only the changes for the specific country would need to be  redone     Furthermore  if it becomes necessary to have more than one Variant of a  specific language country combination  then the variant can be given  This is in  the very rare case where the language in a certain country is spoken slightly  differently in different parts  To enter a variant  type a 2 digit number in the  variant field     The best approach to adopt when choosing locales for translation is as follows           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  144  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 14   Translation        1  Translate the text in the base language  no country selected       2  If modifications are required for a specific country  choose the languag
67.  the Base Plan if this is not already    displayed     Selecting a Floor Plan    To select a Floor Plan      1  Right click on a Building icon  A    Select floor       bar will be displayed     2  Click on this bar  A Select Floor Plan dialog similar to that shown below  will be displayed     3  Select the required Floor and click Apply           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 125  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics        4  The selected Floor Plan will now be displayed in the Main Application  Window     e Select floor plan    E xi  Floor Level Floor Name    Ground Floor                         Select floor plan dialog    ACTI lol xi    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help          Ground Floor                FLOOR PLAN 1   Building 1  Ground Floar                    Sales Noiter  doar  Lift 4 Building Laboratory       Services 70  Dodie ZONE 2    la   Zone il E  Reception es  Area tone    Edo  F3              DOOR 1 Admin Admin Admin      Ml a       Transactions   Alarms      Seq Date Time   Terminal   Event Name Tag            Typical Floor Plan display    Alarms    Alarms are indicated by a moving red bell icon  that replaces the icon for the  Terminal at that the alarm occurred on the Floor Plan  see illustration on next    page            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 126  IXP200 Software Us
68.  the Tags  drop down menu  The Access Groups panel similar to that shown on the  previous page is displayed  For a new site the list is empty      2  Click Add in the top pane  The System allocates a number and the new  entry area is highlighted under Group Name           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 85  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups        3  In the middle pane select the Access Group field  and type in the required  descriptive name  The name should be appropriate and unique to ensure  that it is not confused with other Access Groups      4  In the Security Level field use the mouse to select High or Low as required     Defining an Access Pattern    To define a new Access Pattern  proceed as follows       1  Click Add below the Access Patterns table  The Access Pattern   Day Time  Dialog similar to that shown below is displayed  This dialog defaults to its  Date  amp  Time tab               or  Floor       Select Day Pattern     Sun   Mon   Tue   Wed   Thu   Fri   Sat   Hol       Start Time    00 00    End Time   24 00 Duration   24 00    _9       Access Pattern   Day  Time Dialog       Access Pattern Dialog    This appears when clicking New or double clicking on an existing Access  Pattern  There are three tabs  namely  Day  amp  Time  Door and Floor     Access Pattern   Day  amp  Time Tab    Select Day Pattern    Days of the week selected for this Access 
69.  the database  e g   IXP200  Graphics Designer  etc      2  Click on the Archive short cut  The Archive Password dialog shown will be  displayed        Archive Password dialog     3  Enter the Administrator name and password  and click OK  The Database  Archiver Main Frame will be the displayed  This frame displays the  current database name and the archive folder  that cannot be changed     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 153  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 16   Database Archive         Database Archiver       File            Database    L uxP200wtatabaseproxette gdb          Archive Location    L iXP200atabasei          Archive Date  2003 09 01    No previous archives performed                        Options   Archive       Coms      Cancel             Database Archiver Main Frame     4  The date for the Archive must be selected by clicking on Change and  selected the required date from the calendar displayed  the default is one  month before the current date  All transactions prior to that date will be  removed from the current database and written to the Archive database  If  a previous archive exists  then it will contain data prior to its date and the  new archive will contain data from the last archive up to the new date      5  Click Options to see the Archiving Options dialog  The type of  transaction to be archived may be specified  By default all 
70.  the serial port to which the IXP200 Controller or the ImproX ProxPal  Terminal or the ImproX USB    Registration Reader    is connected as follows      i Proxette  coms  SerialPort D COM1  ii NOTE  Port 0 is COM1 and Port 1 is COM2   iii The baud rate and other settings may be left as default    2  Specify whether the ProxPal Tag Reader or USB    Registration Reader    is  installed    proxette  tagholder tagReader  enabled 0  1 ProxPal or USB Registration Reader installed  0 ProxPal or USB Registration  Reader not installed  Leave all the other settings with their default values     Multiple Databases    In some installations multiple databases may be required  For example  if one  computer is used for several hardware installations  for example  several factory  sites   then separate databases can be supported  one for each site  but they  must all have the same encoding    If your System requires multiple databases  each such database must be renamed  appropriately  e g     IXP200Sitel fdb        IXP200Site2 fdb     and so on  and held in a     site database    folder created by the user   When the PC is used at Site 1  the  appropriate database must be selected at log on  and so on     INSTALLATION PROCEDURE WHEN SEPARATE DATABASE SERVER PC IS  USED    NOTE  When using separate PCs for the  XP200 application and for the Database   the PC where IXP200 is installed is known as the HOST  and the PC where  the Database is installed is know as the SERVER     On the Host PC   
71.  to  display the required Panel  This will give the context while translating      3  Now click the World icon in the toolbar to display the Translate Text  Dialog corresponding to the currently displayed panel     Other    This category includes text and messages that appear in message boxes and  dialogs throughout the Software     Calendar  This option allows translation of calendar text   For Main Frame and Other categories  select a category to translate by    clicking on the relevant icon  A Translate Text Dialog similar to that shown  below is displayed                                                  ate Te ame x  Original New Text  es_EC   COM la  baud   baud  Actions o Actions B o  Controller Check failed  Controller Check failed  Anti Passback Status setto ne     Anti Passback Status setto ne       Status Reports   Status Reports  Palling started  Polling started  Reports   Reports  Controller did not respond Controller did not respond    Time and Event Triggered Actio    Time and Event Triggered Actio     Doors   Doors  at at  Inputs and Outputs Inputs and Outputs  B B  Translate Translate  Auto ID failed to detect a Contro    Auto ID failed to detect a Contro      AutolD of Hardware Units   AutolD of Hardware Units    Check Port   Check Port Le   Cancel   OK    oo  Translate Text Dialog     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 146    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 14   Transla
72.  to change without notice Page 3 113    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 8   Holidays       Holiday Panel Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of all the fields associated with the Holiday Panel   the information displayed in the fields and what the buttons functions are     No    Number allocated to the holiday    Name   Displays the name of the holiday    Start Date   Displays the commencement Date and Month    End Date   Displays the expiry Date and Month    Add   Allows a new holiday to be created    Delete   Removes the selected holiday from the list    Apply   Accepts the new holiday entries into the System database   Cancel   This button removes any new or edited entries from the list    if Apply has not been clicked     Configuring Holidays   Procedure    To configure annual holidays  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Holiday icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu  A Holiday Panel similar to that shown above is  displayed  For a new site the list is empty     2  Click Add to add a new holiday  A New Holiday Dialog similar to that  shown below is displayed     x    Name   Start Date  y   End Date  y        New Holiday Dialog          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 114  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 8   Holidays       New Holiday Dialog    Name   Name of the new holiday    Start
73.  with  similar basic access requirements will be allocated the same Access Group     An Access Group is made up of one or more Access Patterns  each specifying  the days of the week and time of day during that access is allowed and also to  that doors and lift  elevator  floors     Each Tag is allowed one Access Group only  though the Group may have up to  8 Access Patterns      The Tagholder only receives the    allowed    response when presenting his Tag if  both the allocated Access Group and the current Door Mode have permission     NOTE  A Door Mode alone can never give access  except in the case of the  Open mode   only the Access Group can define access  However a  Door Mode can restrict or relax the access requirements  The Tag  level can also further restrict or relax the Door Mode or access  conditions     All groups conform to a single Anti Pass Back  APB  lockout delay     Access Groups Security Levels    Each Access Group that is entered into the System is allocated either High or  Low security     Tags with level 1 and 2 are restricted to Low security Access Groups  When an  OPERATOR user logs on  he can only allocate Tags with level 1 and 2  and  hence also only Low security Access Groups  An OPERATOR user may also not  define an Access Group     Only Tags with a Tag level of 3  SUPERVISOR  and 4  ADMINISTRATOR  are  allocated to groups having a    High    security level setting  Therefore     High  security groups    would only be available to allocate to a Ta
74.  you already have it     If you have an older version of Firebird installed on the computer  then stop all  Firebird related applications and services and uninstall Firebird first           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Then      1  To start a manual Firebird installation  run the Firebird Setup exe file in the  Firebird folder on the  XP200 CD      2  When asked to select    Additional Tasks     the settings should all be checked by  default  Always run Firebird as a service on an operating System which  supports it  Windows 98 does not support services  so when using this  operating System select Firebird as an application      3  Jaybird  which is the JDBC driver for Firebird  is automatically installed with  IXP200 Software  The current version is V1 5      4  Reboot the computer when the Installation Wizard has completely terminated      5  After rebooting  check in Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services that  Firebird Server and Firebird Guardian Services are running     Database Considerations    The default folder for the installed database to be used by IXP200 is  IXP200 database and the default name is    proxette fdb        Different regions of the world use different encoding for their databases   these are  listed below  From V3 4 2 on  the Software installs a database by default to match  the locale chosen  but only if no existing    proxette fdb    file is pres
75. 00    _9  8      Daylight Saving dialog             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 28  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       To set the Time Offset  enter the hours and minutes in the Time Offset box   To set the Start Date  select the Start Date drop down menu from the Daylight  Saving dialog  and choose the required date  Click on the chosen date to accept  the setting    To set the Start Time  type the required time into the Start Time box     Set the End Date and End Time in a similar way       5  x     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help                  Controller    Controller Port C com    com2  ProxPal Enabled C Yes    No     set Daylight Savin x    Mode  Optional   Time Offset   00 00    L Start Date Le  start time   00 00  APB Lockout Delay  minutes   December 22  2002       Site Communication Seed  0   no El   Sun Mon   Tue  wed   Thu   Fri   sat  2 3    s   o  7          Controller Enabled E     e a  1   11  ql il Q  SS  as   16  17  18  19  20  22 Saving      22   23   24   26   26   27 28     22   30   31          _9                                                                                   Transactions   Alarms         Daylight Saving   typical calendar    NOTE  7o quit the calendar window without choosing a date press the escape  button on the keyboard     The start and expiry date can be deleted by 
76. 007 Impro Technologies    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page 3 6          Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       Typical Floor Plan and Block Diagram    A Floor Plan and Block Diagram for a typical fictitious installation are shown on  the next two pages                    Strongroom   E   3 N   2     gt  uy al   12    la      2 S N  7    3   2  lt  2   5    x      an     Q Y   El a   z   3     a   x   Oo   9   z DG    S E  55    au          Emergency  Generator                Emergency  Unlock  Button        MHR       DOOR 5       Accounts  Reception  Area    DOOR 1       Figure 1   Floor plan for Excel Products ground floor       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 7  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction                 IXP 200 Software IXP920 1 0 GB ProxPal Desktop  Reader converts  RS232 to RS485 and  reads tags  Used  when Controller is  more than 15m  away from PC                   py    RS485       BUS  AS EE  Onine OR Controller    Offline    ra IXP920 1 0 GB    LELEELES        Emergency Unlock       Up to 16 locationsidoors can be controlled      Assigned  by each IXP 200 system sas Lift      Controls                    APD              improX DT ImproX MR    ImproX KR       ImproX DT          Up to 4 Lifts Elevators  can be controlled a Y     LIFT 1  ImproX 016    SIMPLE BUILDING MANAGEM
77. 01 OK                                 Configure Controller Port 2   RS232    RS485    ControllerLa     ok                Miscellaneous Facilities dialog          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       Setting the Logical Address of the Controller or a Terminal    This could be done  for example  where a Terminal from another System is  installed into the System  and has a previous LA which conflicts with another  unit     Set Default Message    The facility permits the user to set the default message which appears on the  IXP200 Controller s and DL Terminals    LCDs     In an IXP200 System  the Controller LA will always be 01   To set the message  type the required message into the fields provided and  click OK     Configure Controller Port 2    This facility permits the selection of Controller Port 2 for either RS232  default   or RS 485 format communications     In an IXP200 System  Port 2 on the Controller is configured as follows      a  RS232 when the Controller is connected directly to the PC     b  RS485 when a ProxPal Reader or ImproX RS Registration Reader is  connected between the Controller and the PC     Clearing the Controller memory    The Controller s memory can be cleared using this facility        CAUTION   This will also clear the Transaction Database                    June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to 
78. 25 kHz Tags  It is used with  the ImproX RS        MULTI  FUNCTI ON TERMI NALS       Table 8   Group 3   Multifunction Terminals          ImproX MfT             ImproX Multifunction Terminal  Can  be used with any one of the Antenna  Readers listed in Table 6  or the  Remote Readers listed in Table 3  as  well as several biometric  magstripe   barcode remote readers     This unit is able to function normally  independently of the system if  communications with the system are  interrupted           O June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 1 8       Section 1   System Overview          Table 8   Group 3   Multifunction Terminals          ImproX TRT  Twin Remote  Terminal             Can be used with any of the following  units      Multi mode Remote Readers   mproX  XFMp  XFMpk  XFMm  XFMmk    Receivers  ImproX RF  IR    Wiegand Readers  Impro     3  party       WIEGAND READERS       Table 9   Wiegand Readers                      Impro 26   or 44 bit  Wiegand Reader for  Wiegand 26 Harsh Environments  without keypad    or 44  Non        keypad Metal   This can be used with the ImproX PT  Reader or TA  but not with the ImproX TT    Impro 26   or 44 bit  Wiegand Reader for  Wiegand 26 Harsh Environments  with keypad     or 44  Keypad   This can be used with the ImproX PT  Metal Reader   or TA  but not with the ImproX TT         OTHER READERS    The System is designed to support several types of third part
79. 3  Click in the Event Triggered Action combo box and select the required  Event Triggered Action from the dropdown list      4  Edit the days of week or time and duration as required    5  Add or remove monitored inputs as required      6  To change state of a monitored input  remove it first and add it again with  the correct state           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 71  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions        7  Select the required Action and set its parameters      8  Click Apply to save the edited record     Deleting an Existing Event Triggered Action    To Delete an Event Triggered Action  proceed as follows     1  Click on the Action icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration    drop down menu      2  Choose the Event Triggered Actions tab      3  Click in the Event triggered Action combo and select the required Event  Triggered Action from the dropdown list      4         Click Delete     to remove it from System        This concludes the configuration of the Time  Event triggered Actions           INDEX      Reason Mode  49   Access  6  21  37  46  48  49   Actions  6  21  61  62  63  64  65   67  68  70  71  72   Administrator  18  24  46  49   Alarm  23  24  25  26  27  32  34   46  48  49  55  61   Alarm Arming  24  34   Anti PassBack  32   APB  24  26  27  32  34  35  42  46   Armed Mode  49   Auto Identification  19   Aut
80. 6 IP  4 5  6  15  16  17    commands  4 IP address  4  5  6  computer  3  5  6 LAN  6  Control Panel  6  13   laptop  5  Conventions  3 LINKLOCAL  5    DHCP  5  6  Dial Up Networking  4    local area network  6  loopback adapter  6  9  17    Graphic  Modem Card  4    graphic representation  3 network adapter  5  6    Graphical User Interface  3          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 18  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 2   English Terminology          network based  4 US English  18  peer to peer network  4 users  6  server  4  5 Virtual Private Network  4  Server  4 VPN  4  system program  9 Windows  3  4  5  6  TCP IP  5 WINIPCFG  6  UK English  18  USER S NOTES     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 19    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 2   English Terminology       USER   S NOTES    APPLICABILITY OF THIS MANUAL    The last two digits of the standard Impro stock code indicate the issue status of  the item concerned  This manual is applicable to the IXP200 Series Software   Version 6 0 onwards  The next issue of this section of the manual will determine  the final software issue to which this manual issue is applicable     Please advise us of any errors or omissions in this manual  to enable us to improve our service to you     Thank you for choosing  mpro products to implement your access control  system     I
81. 7 04 12 57 03   00  Tables Initialised                            Upload error  Terminals Door Mode Patterns  pad jo DB COM       Door Entry Panel    Entry and Exit Tabs   Middle Panel  NOTE  7he layout of the Door Exit Tab is the same as the Door Entry Tab     Reader Function   Select Time and Attendance if transactions  from this Reader must be exported for time and  attendance purposes  The default setting is  Access Control Only     DOS  Door Open   The DOS Mode allows the selection of either   Sensing  Mode Normally Open or Normally Closed contact  the  choice depends on the type of sensing switches  that are used  Details must be obtained from  the Installer  A non  zero Open duration must be  set to enable DOS           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 37  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 3   Door Configuration       RTE Mode    DOS Usage    Normal    Terminate Strike    Inhibit    Strike Duration    Open Duration    Enable Offline  Validation    Message   optional     Display    On Valid  Invalid  Tag    LED Action  Buzzer Volume    Duration    The RTE Mode allows the selection of either  Normally Open or Normally Closed    Request to  Enter Exit    switch contacts  the choice depends  on the type of sensing switches that are used   Details must be obtained from the Installer     Determines how DOS is used   Normal   Terminate Strike and Inhibit  see below      Valid Tag pres
82. 884 tees ad tir  e dorada ceda 65  CONFIGURING TIME TRIGGERED ACTIONS   PROCEDURE                       65  Relay Action Configuration sienien nn nn cnn nn r narra ronca 67      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 2    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration          Editing an Existing Time Triggered Action            cecceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateeees 67  Deleting a Time Triggered Action    67  EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION CONFIGURATION   oocicococcnnocccocnonnnnnononncncnnanns 68  Event Triggered Actions Tab   00ooococnnncnnononconnnnnnnnonnnanan nn nnn nn rc rra nana rra 68  ACTIONS seis aaa 69  EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION CONFIGURATION   PROCEDURE    69  Editing an Existing Event Triggered Action    ooonnnnnconccnonnnicnncnannnnonnnnn 71  Deleting an Existing Event Triggered Action           ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeees 72  INDEX sine rer anne nn A RE winds ania a reset etant 72     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 3    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 4  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       CHAPTER 1   INTRODUCTION  GENERAL    The IXP200 Software Suite has been designed with user friendliness as a major  design criterion     The System must be configur
83. 90  91  101  105   Access Pattern  85  86  87  88  89   90   Adhesive Labels  108   Administrator  83  92   alarm  92  124  125  129   Anti Passback  130  135   APB  83  91  92  100  102  104   130  135   APB Zone  102   BACKUP  147   Base Plan  124   calendar  115  144   card printing  99  106   card tag  106   Choose Locale  141  142  145   communication  136   Configuration  85  106  114  116   118  119  120  135  145  146   credit card tag  99  122   default  107  119  127  142  145   148  149   Department  93  97  98  108   Designer Module  124   Door Mode  83  91   Emergency Open Close Doors  136   Employee Number  97  106   end date  113   Event Triggered Actions  117   Expiry Date  100  105   field  86  87  88  93  98  100  101   102  104  105  106  113  115   116  119  142   fingerprint  91  100  102   fixed address  138  139   Floor Plan  124  125  126  127  129   Graphics  124  126  128  129  135   Icon  83  92  95  98  113  115   124  127  148   LCD  117  118  119    lift  elevator   83  88   Localisation  141   Logical Address  136  148   Message  101  105  117  118   119  138   Normal Tag  91   Operator  105  106   PAC  102   password  141   PC  92  108  135  145   Personal Access Code  102   photograph  94  95   PIN  94  102   Remote Reader  131   Runtime Module  124   Sagem  91   Security Level  84  86   site  85  94  114  138   slim tag  102   Start Date  100  104  105  114  115   Supervisor  91  92   SUPERVISOR  83   Supervisor level tag  91   system databas
84. 92   168   150   100  Subnet mask    255  295   255    10  Default gateway    192   168   150  100           Obtain DNS server address automatically         Use the following DNS server addresses     Preferred DNS server     is a    Altemate DNS server      E 4    Advanced                  Cancel         Enter addresses on Internet Protocol  TCP  I P  Properties Screen   27 The display waits for the user to enter the addresses required    28  Enter the addresses as displayed above   IP Address 192 168 150 100  Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0  Default Gateway 192 168 150 100   29  After typing in the addresses click OK     The display will return to the settings screen  Close the screen to return to the  Desktop and then Reboot to activate the loopback adapter     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 17  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 2   English Terminology       APPENDIX 2   ENGLISH TERMI NOLOGY  REGI ONAL DIFFERENCES IN ENGLISH TERMI NOLOGY    The table below gives the US English equivalents of terms that may appear in  UK English in this manual     UK ENGLISH US ENGLISH  Lift   Elevator  Ground floor   First floor  First floor   Second floor  Reception   Lobby  Car park   Parking lot  Surname   Last name  Tick   Check  INDEX  Access System  3 GUI  3  Adapter  4  6  12 Host PC  4  address  4  5  6  16 con    administration RES Internet Protocol  4  15  16  17    administrators  
85. ALID  TAG  LED Action   The state of the LED when a Tag is  presented   Buzzer Volume   The buzzer volume when a Tag is presented   Duration   The period of time the LED and Buzzer  Volume are active during Tag presentation      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  43    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       Readerl1   4 Configuration Procedure     1  In the Output Terminal field  it is necessary to link the Reader to an Output  Terminal that can activate the lift  elevator  buttons      2  Select the Terminal shown on the Unit Location Chart from the Output  Terminal dropdown menu     NOTE  This menu will be blank until the output Terminals have themselves  been configured  So on the first pass  leave this field blank  and save  the Reader data by pressing Apply  Come back to this point and select  the Output Terminal after it has been configured      3  After configuring Inputs and Outputs  see INPUT  OUTPUT  TERMINALS   select this Terminal on the second pass     4  In the On Invalid Tag window  Select the LED and Buzzer Action that must  occur on presentation of an invalid Tag and then click in the Duration fields  to enter period of time  minimum 2 digits 20   2 seconds  the Action must  be active     5  In the On Valid Tag window  Select the LED and Buzzer Action that must  occur on presentation of a valid Tag and then click in the Duration fields to  enter pe
86. B Zones Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer       File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a  Back    gt    QA A  AQsearch Ggravorites Meda  4   Eye B  Address      http   localhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports HoursWReport v   Go  Links  gt     Hours Worked in APB Zones Report    Submit   Export Report  CSV                         Return to the Web Reports Main page    Select Person    Clara Calisto y  Date from 2003 06 01     to  2003 06 30 E     Summary Only    7    Hours at Work  LastOut FirstIn    00 00 00  Hours Worked within APB Zones   00 00 00     Error in processing         Date Filter   2003 06 01 to 2003 06 30         Name   Date   Time   Event   Terminal   Zone  Reason      Clara Calisto 2003 06 11   153440   Allowed In   MainDoor   1    Clara Calisto 2003 06 13 09 14 40 APB Override In MainDoor   1      Return to the Web Reports Main page          El       fox Local FE  Hours Worked in APB Report Page    The Hours Worked in APB Zone Report provides a report of the hours that a  specified Tagholder spent at work and the hours he she spent within APB  Zones  These details are provided for a period which may be selected by the  viewer     The required person must be selected from the Person combo box     Selecting the Date from or Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be  displayed  as described previously under Access Reports      A summary report may be selected by clicking on the Summary box     See next page       June 2007 Impro Techno
87. Building  Management     A number assigned as a Tag  of type  Personal Access Code  to one Master  record  Used as a Tag  when the door is in  Personal Access Code mode  This  number must be a unique value in the  database and may not exceed 9 digits     Personal Identification Number   associated with one Master record        PIN may be required  according to the  system configuration  in addition to Tag  presentation for greater access security     A PIN is always used in conjunction with a  Tag  for example  when the door is in  Tag PIN mode  This number is not a  unique value in the database   A Tag from which data may be read  and  to which data may be written     A device that reads Tag data and makes  this data available to the Controller via the          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 4    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM    Reason Code    Relaxed Anti Passback  Relaxed Exit Conditions    Remote Reader    Server PC    Site    Site SLA  SLA    Slave    EXPLANATION    Terminal bus  In the IXP200 system the  term    reader    refers to the combination of  a Remote Reader  or equivalent  and a  Door Terminal or Portal Terminal     A code describing a reason for requesting  access  usually an exit  at a given  Terminal     See Anti Passback   Relaxed     If this condition is selected  a valid Tag   holder will be able to exit after his Access  Pattern has elapsed     A unit that h
88. C51E3 MR  Despatch 108 004C51F2 le  Front Door 03 O04C51E5 MR  TTR Door loa poscan  TTR  Litt Control 2 09  000F43ES 1016  Buiking Outputs 00 O00F43EC 1016  Bulking Inputs 13 000F4348 hs  i       IMPORTANT  A unit must first be uninstalled  then removed from the bus before it can  be replaced  The replacement unit must be of identical or similar type   DO NOT AUTOID when replacing a unit  select the uninstalled unit and click Replace    Uninstal   Replace Close      Typical Replace or Uninstall Unit Dialog    When this dialog is visible  all polling is halted     Removing or Replacing a Terminal    First decide if the Terminal is to be permanently removed or whether it is to be   replaced by another Terminal  In this example  a faulty Terminal is to be   replaced  Proceed as follows      1  Click on Hardware on the toolbar and select Replace Unit from the  dropdown menu  The Replace or Uninstall Unit Dialog similar to that  shown above is displayed      2  Select the required Terminal from the list and click Uninstall    3  Confirm by clicking Yes or exit by clicking No     FAUninstall Unit  x         Are you sure you want to uninstall this unit        Uninstall Confirmation Dialog     4  Information message may advise that Uninstall failed  If the unit is faulty  click Yes to uninstall anyway           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  139  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other S
89. D CSV FORMAT    The CSV file is similar in concept to the Mail Merge system used by MS Word   It comprises a file that has a heading line which corresponds to the Database  entry names  and then in sequence  the various entries  The file would  normally be in Notepad or WordPad or similar Text form    Do not use MSWord or Corel Word Perfect or similar word processing software  as these programs include hidden characters which are used for text formatting   The file must be in pure Text   txt  format  with commas separating the data  fields  and each line ending with a normal Carriage Return  Enter Key    Following the descriptions given of the Table Fields  or Database fields  the  following examples illustrate the possible compilation of a CSV file    The sequence of the record fields is not necessarily fixed but must be consistent  throughout a file    The name spelling is important and an incorrectly spelled name field will  normally result in failure of the program to work as it cannot locate a required  field    Once the Table fields are defined in the first line of the record  the data in the  data lines must follow the correct sequence  The use of the inverted commas  on all fields except integer fields is important     Example      Department Records  File to be called  DEPARTMENT CSV     DPT_NO   DPT_NAME   26  Marketing   13  Factory   40  Design   DPT NO_IDPT_NAME  40 Marketing    13 Factory  26 Design    DEPARTMENT table   sample    Master Records  File to be call
90. Date is required  click on the arrow icon in the Expiry Date field  Select the  date as described for the Start Date      8  In the Access Group field  click on the arrow icon  and select an Access  Group from the list available to this user and Tag level   This is mandatory    NOTE  4  Tags must have an Access Group  However  an Access Group with    no access to any door can be defined and assigned to a Tag as a  place holder for a valid Access Group to be assigned at a later stage      9  The Usage field is used to identify employee Tags  if an employee has been  issued with more than one  Click in the box and type in the required name  e g  Vehicle Tag   Optional       10 1f a message should be associated with this Tag  click on the arrow icon in  the Message field  and select from the list of pre entered messages  This  message will be displayed each time the Tag is presented to a Reader with  a display    NOTE   f the Tagholder must operate the IXP200 and logon as a user    continue with step  11   otherwise skip to    Saving the Tagholder  Record         11  Click on the Operator tab  A New Tagholder   Operator Tab similar to that  shown below will be displayed     A New Tag Holder E 4 3 x     General   Details   Tag Operator      This tagholder is an operator       Operator UserID           New Tagholder   Operator Tab          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 105  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Con
91. Door  Admin                                                 Return to the Configuration main page          PT   E tocal intranet  Door Access Configuration Report    Doors are listed on the left  Click a door to display a list of those people who are  allowed access to the door  as well as details of the relevant access group     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 14    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Door Configuration Report       3  Door Configuration    Microsoft Internet Explorer    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help         Back       Q A   Qsearch Gyravorites   meda   ES   amp   Address ja http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports DoorConfigReport      Go  Links  gt     Door Configuration                      Submit    Export Report  CSV     Return to the Configuration main page                                                                         P  MainDoor  Yes   1 No   456   o1010103   01010107  Sunday pac  Monday pac  Tuesday pac  Wednesday pac  Thursday pac  Friday pac  Saturday pac    Holiday   pac   es   Lifts  No      No   o   mmm   Sunday Weekend  Monday Weekday  Tuesday Weekday  Wednesday Weekday  Thursday Weekday  Friday Weekday  Saturday Weekend   l   OE T  BE Local intranet    Door Configuration Report    This report includes details of each door configuration  including the daily  operating modes     See next page       June 2007 Impr
92. Door Entry Code Menu    This menu permits the manual entry or editing of Door Entry Codes               Tagholders To from Settings Menu         Door Entry Code    aL         Door Entry Code Opti  Door     ptions    am    All Doors     gt  FS         The name of a configured    door will appear here     Add Edit  DOOR ENTRY CODE    Tl FS                                                   Add Edit  DOOR ENTRY CODE  0 9 V X  Store new data  Enter DEC  Refresh old data  Y  Door Entry Code vsd  Le  Door Entry Code Menu     June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 21    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       SYSTEM SETTINGS MENUS    All of the menus which are related to system settings are entered via the  Settings menu  The data presented here is related  where appropriate  to the  data used in Section 3 of this manual                                                                                                                                                                D System Off line a  Present  Administrator s Tag to  Controller    65   Tagholders Settings  F5     menu menu   see separate diagram  for details of Tagholders menu      y  5  ce Unlock  enu     65  Transactions       menu      PC Comms     Alarm Arm Relay F  menu   meny  lt       _  DID  Le    Peripheral Port E Reset System  menu e menu ld   GD   Debug Mode  lt           4  E    an  j  Settings menu detail vsd  Settings Menu Options     June 2007 Impro Tec
93. Door Locked mode    h  Can manually edit Tag database at Controller  when supported by  Firmware     TAGHOLDER    A Tagholder is a person who was allocated a Tag to gain access to the Site   When the Tag is removed from a person  the person   s Master record would  remain in the PC   s database to maintain the integrity of historical reports   However  the Tag would be removed from the Controller database and would  not be allowed access when presented to any Reader  Up to three Tags can be  allocated to the same Tagholder                                                    The next item to be configured is the Tagholders  To access the Tagholders       Panel click on the W  Icon   See next page     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 92    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       mE   5  xi    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Card Designer Help              0   0 ECN             Tag Holder  Search By  X   Value     ran             Last Name Address Company       John   Walton 13 Fairway  Newport Excel Products Laboratory  James Nigel  Haines clo Acme Electrical  Lakeside Drive  Cascade Acme Electrical  E Clara  Calisto 77 Shaw Avenue  Mountain View Excel Products   Admin      4  viiam  Newton 339 Starling Crescent  McGillucuddy Street  Overton  Excel Products Admin    Mur               Transactions    Alarms                         Tagholder Panel    Tagholder Panel F
94. E yzizo sooz   03 EJ Lozoraooz     wo apq         gt    SR UA                i      a2ed uwy spoday qa AA ay  07 umyay           ASQ  uodey podxg                H yod  y 3994S2UI y  Juan re dog          yodeydruawyedag syodaagamqem zxdi  oadw yaujajas syodaaqamjsoyiezo    duy   gt   ssauppy             BE  G   pu  uit  peso   Y FO  e  ves    deH soo  s  yosey maA API ad          1340 03 J9U43 U  YOSOAIIP     140d3Y J934 531  EM a       4  39    Page    Data subject to change without notice    June 2007 Impro Technologies      IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       The Department Time Sheet Report provides a report Tagholders  grouped by  Department  showing the first and last transactions of each day  and the  calculated time difference between them  The results are summarized as the  total per Tagholder    These details are provided for a one or more days  which may be selected by   the viewer  The following selections must be made before clicking Submit      1  The required date range must be selected  Selecting the Date from or  Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be displayed  as described  previously under Access Reports      2  The report may be filtered by Person  Department and Zone     3  Check the Hide Empty Departments box to exclude these from the  selection list     The report can be exported in CSV format     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  40  OIXP200 Software 
95. EM SETTINGS  MENUS coccion tie ag aa ea ia ie aaar iai a 22  Settings Men   sasaaa daa nh he nabo 23  Emergency Unlock renna a a a a an een eee 23  Transactions Menu cononncccnncncnononnannnnnonononnn naar nn nn r nn reno rra nn rn r rr rr rn rra 24  Debug  Mode Menu coincida deere dsd 27  Alarm Arm Relay Menu    28  Peripheral Port Menu is 29  RTE Lateh Mena tournent ERa 29  DIE SR ER dows lensed 31      June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 3    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities             June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 4  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       INTRODUCTION  NOTE  This information describes the options available in Version 3 04 of the  Controller firmware     It is possible to edit certain IXP200 system functions using the keypad and LCD  on the system   s Controller     NOTE  7he PC software must be off line to permit use of this editing facility     The Controller menu system allows the Administrator to Add  Delete or Edit Tag  information as well as to change specific system settings   Entering the Menu    To enter the menu  present an Administrator Tag at the Controller     NOTE    f the PC software is on line then access to the menu is blocked until  the software is exited  The menu is blocked for a further 20 seconds  after exiting the software before it is available to enter     If no keypad activity is detected for 3 minutes then th
96. ENT  Example    ImproX DT ImproX MR    Air conditioning        Emergency  Generator    Oven Preheat  inex 015 MTL    Mains available       Oven at 180  C    Roller Door open    ImproX 116    Figure 2  Block diagram of the Excel Products   XP200 System          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       NOTE   A typical  XP200 System block diagram is included in Section 1 of this  manual  That diagram shows some System features that are not used  in the example shown in Figure 2     Main Application Window    The Main Application Window  see the illustration on the next page  has a menu  and toolbar at the top and two panes below it  The upper pane displays an  information panel for the menu item selected  and can also switch to the  Graphics Runtime display panel  When an alarm transaction is received  the  Graphics panel automatically switches to the front  A tool bar with buttons  provides quick access to commonly used menu items        The       button allows the user to toggle between Graphics and Configur   ation panels     The lower pane displays current Transactions polled from the Controller  The  centre bar dividing these panes may be moved by clicking the arrows on it  or  by dragging it  The default position of the bar has been chosen so that none of  the buttons or controls on the main panel is obscured     The menu provides c
97. IN   Reason Dual Tag   Record   Denied Alarm LED  No      1  00 00 05 00 Supervisor unlock No  Both Yes Yes Red  2  05 00 17 00 Tag No  No No Yes No Flashing Red  3 17 00 24 00 Supervisor unlock No  Both Yes No off Blink Red                                          Example of Configured Door Mode Patterns Panel    After the Door Mode Patterns have been defined  they are available for setting  the Day Mode of any Door  see Day Mode Setting      Deleting a Time Slot  To delete a Time Slot  edit the end time of the previous slot to be the same as    the end time of the slot to be deleted  It will then disappear  Click Apply to  save        THIS CONCLUDES THE CONFIGURATION OF THE DOORS                 June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 56  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals       CHAPTER 4   INPUT  OUTPUT TERMI NALS  GENERAL    This chapter describes the configuration of Input and Output Terminals     The panel is used to allocate appropriate names to the Digital Input and Output  Terminals and to configure these Terminals for use     NUMBER OF TERMINALS IN A SYSTEM    A maximum of six Input Output Terminals can be connected to this System   four to control Lifts  elevators  and two for Building Management     BUILDING MANAGEMENT    The System can be configured as follows for Building Management    e 1x116 Terminal   e 1x 016 Terminal     LIFT  ELEVATOR  CONTROL    Th
98. Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  33  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Person Report  lex    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help  Back    gt      A   Qsearch GyFavorites meda   Ey G                   Address El http  localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports PersonReport hd Go   Links                                                        Person Report    Ska  tA  Submit Export Report  CSV      f     Return to the Web Reports Main page    ie  Select Person    Juliet Summerfield y   UN       Date from 2003 06 01     to  2003 07 31 E  LR  y3  Personal Details A  Tatiet  Summerfield  Company Details  Company    Exc el Products  Department  Admin  Employee D       BS  Transaction Report   ai  ax  Date Filter   2003 06 01 to 2003 07 31 al lv       Sample Person Report    The Person Report provides information about a selected Tagholder  including  his her access transactions over a selected period     The required person must be selected from the Person combo box     Selecting the Date from or Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be  displayed  as described previously under Access Reports      A sample report is shown in the two illustrations   the second shows the lower  part of the report containing the transaction details     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  34  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports  
99. InterBase related applications and services  When no services are  running  uninstall InterBase as described in the paragraphs which follow     NOTE  This is absolutely necessary as problems will be encountered if it is not  done     The following general steps should be followed       i  Stop InterServer  Start Programs InterBase InterClient  InterServer  Configuration Utility   Go to the Advanced tab and click Stop      ii  Stop InterBase Guardian if this is used   Windows 98 users should see this          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     in the Task Bar  but other Windows users may have this running as a  service       iii  Stop InterBase Server  Start Programs InterBase  Server Manager     iv  Uninstall InterBase 6 01  Control Panel Add Remove Programs     v    Uninstall InterClient  Control Panel Add Remove Programs      NOTE  7his procedure may vary slightly and depends on the operating System used  and the way the database was configured    2  Once InterBase has successfully been uninstalled  the new IXP200 Software  can be installed as described below     Installation Procedure   Single  Host  PC    NOTES   1  Before running setup files  quit all other applications     2  The installation procedure is described in several languages in the Installation  Software  The required language can be chosen using the drop down menu in  the Installation introductory window     IXP 200     Engi
100. Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 14   Translation       Translate Web Reports x        Select      Select      Configuration Reports    Configuration Main Page       Transaction Reports      zl                Translate    x          Translate Web Reports dialog           5  Click Translate to proceed with translation  or Cancel to abort      6  If Translate is selected  the following dialog will be displayed      7  Replace the English text in the right hand column with the equivalent    translation      8  Click Apply  i e  OK  to Accept  or Cancel to escape without saving the    changes     NOTE  Do not edit the same report twice in one session      amp  Translate Text   ConfigMain x        ag Holder Configuration reports    Tag Configuration reports               New Text  es_ES   Tag Holder Configuration reports  Tag Configuration reports                Select Language and Locale    Select Language and Locale          Return to the Web Reports main page    Return to the Web Reports main page       lO Device Configuration reports       10 Device Configuration reports       Door Mode Configuration reports       Door Mode Configuration reports       Door Access Configuration reports       Door Access Configuration reports       Access Group Configuration reports    Access Group Configuration reports           Terminal Configuration reports    Terminal Configuration reports       Time Triggered Configuration reports       Time Triggered Configuration r
101. June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  24  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       There are two categories of filters  namely Main Filters and Other Filters     The Main Filters  i e  Date Time  Person or Location  are those most  commonly used     The Other Filters can be used separately or Multiple filters can be used to  generate more specific report information as described under The Use of  Multiple Filters       File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      A   Search  Favorites CBristory   Es  Ej      Address E  http   localhost webreports servlet net  impro ipx2 web webreports AccessReport x  Go    Links      Daily Time from   00 00 00 to  23 59 59  24 Hour Clock   Person Arturo Fettucini x    Location   X                   Other Filters    I Department   I Tag No     I Event Type  I Reason Code        Name Filter   Arturo Fettucini  Date Filter   2003 05 05 to 2003 07 17  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59                                        INo   Date   Time Name Department Location   Event Tag No   Reason      61  2003 06 13   09 18 52 Arturo Fettucini Admin MainDoor   AllowedIn  208038350421  62  2003 06 13   09 44 17 Arturo Fettucini Admin Main Door  APB Override In  202038350421   63  2003 06 13   09 45 44   Arturo Fettucini Admin CarPark   AllowedIn  208038350421   69  2003 06 13   09 49 30   Arturo Fettucini Admin   Main Door  APB Override In  208038350421   72  2003 06 13   09 51 04
102. Nigel Haines Main AllowedIn  208038343237 z  E mf  dE Local intranet          Access Report   Location Filter activated    Person Filter    Select an individual Person from the drop down combo box if required  A report  will be generated including access information only for the Person selected  for  the default time period on the current date     To generate a Report on all Persons  leave the Person box blank   Click Submit to process the request        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 27  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Department Filter    Check the Department check box  and select the Department required from the  drop down list which appears  Using the Department filter alone generates a  Report of access records for the Department selected only  for the default time  period on the current date     Tag No  Filter    Click the Tag No  check box  and type the required Tag Number into the text  box which appears  Using the Tag No  Filter alone generates a Report of access  records for the Tag No  selected only  for the default time period on the current  date     Event Type Filter    Click the Event Type check box  and select the required Event Type from the  drop down list which appears  A Report will be generated for the event selected  for the default time period on the current date     If a report on all Event Types is required  leave the Event Type check box  blank     Reports can also be pri
103. No Access Floors   Displays the floors not selected for access    Add   Moves the selected floors from the No Access list to  the Allowed Access list    Remove   Moves the selected floors from the Allowed Access list    to the No Access list           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  88  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups        10 To remove a Door  Floor from the Access Doors  Floors Fields  first  select the required Door or Floor  and then click Remove to transfer the  selection back to the No Access Doors  Floors fields     11  Click Ok to accept the new Access Pattern  or click Cancel to reject it or  refresh an existing one  This returns the display to the Access Group  Panel  where the new Access Pattern is displayed in the Access Pattern  list     Adding More Access Patterns    Add additional Access Patterns in the same manner  as required  up to a  maximum of 8 Access Patterns per Access Group     Saving an Access Group    Click Apply to accept the new Access Group into the System database  or on the  Cancel to reject new data or refresh the existing Access Group data     CAUTION    Failure to click Apply after adding a new Access Time Pattern or editing an  existing one would result in the data being lost        Editing an Existing Access Pattern    To Edit an Access Pattern  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Access Groups icon on the toolbar or select 
104. ON READER  in place of  the ProxPal   7he COM port for USB communications is allocated as part  of this procedure     STARTI NG UP THE I XP200 SYSTEM    To run the Software  proceed as follows      1    2     Click on the IXP200 icon displayed on your Desktop screen    If the icon is not displayed on the Desktop proceed as follows    i  Click on Start     ii  Click on Programs     iii  Click on IXP200 and then the   XP200 icon           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  16  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Initial Operations    A Username and Password are required when logging onto the IXP200 System  Software     NOTE   7he password is case sensitive    The default Username and Password for logging onto the System are   Username   SYSDBA  Password E masterkey    When the IXP200 installation and configuration is complete  the Password must be  changed to protect the security of the database  Refer to the    Change Password     paragraph for this procedure     TROUBLESHOOTI NG    If the Logon Dialog box appears when running the Software  then the IXP200 and   the JRE have been installed correctly    If the logon operation fails  the most common problems are     a  Password is in the wrong case  It should be    masterkey     lower case      b  The database server  Firebird Server  is not running  During installation it will  have been automatically configured to start as a service  if supported  or as an  application in the Windo
105. OUND    BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT  YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY RETURN THE PACKAGE IN UNOPENED FORM     AND YOU WILL RECEIVE A REFUND OF YOUR MONEY     1  LICENSE GRANT  Licenser hereby grants you  and you accept  a non exclusive  license to use the Program CDROM and the computer  Software contained therein  object code only from   collectively referred to as the Software   and the  accompanying User documentation  only as authorised in  this License Agreement  The Software may be used only on  a single computer owned  leased  or otherwise controlled by  you  or in the event of the inoperability of that computer  on  a backup computer selected by you  Concurrent use on two  or more computers is not authorised without the advance  written consent of Licenser and the payment of additional  license fees  You agree that you will not assign sublicense   transfer  pledge  lease  rent  or share your rights under this  License agreement     2  LICENSOR RIGHTS  You acknowledge and agree that the Program consists of  proprietary  unpublished products of Licensor  protected  under Copyright Law and trade secret laws of general  applicability  You further acknowledge and agree that all  right  title  and interest in and to the Program are and shall  remain with Licensor  This License Agreement does not  convey to you an interest in or to the Program  but only a  imited right of use revocable in accordance with the terms  of this LICENSE Agreement     3  LICENSE FEES  The License fees
106. P200 Application  Software     What s New in this Release       WHAT   S NEW IN THIS RELEASE  V6 0     The release of Software version V6 0 provides the following new features      e Database Server  This allows the IXP200 database to be installed on a  separate Server PC     e The system now supports the use of an Editing Workstation  This means  that the IXP200 Software can be now be installed on a second machine  that serves as an Editing Workstation only  This machine has no connection  to the system hardware  Controller  etc   A ProxMate or Registration  Reader may be installed on the Editing Workstation for convenience  The  Editing Station is used to edit the IXP200 Database  for example by adding  or deleting Tagholders     e Image Editor  The picture file imported for a Tagholder can be cropped   rotated  resized  etc from the Tagholder dialog     e Archive will now create archive databases on the Database Server  which  will be accessible for Web Reports     e Backup can now be executed automatically when using a Database Server  but must be manually restored when required     e The Web Server port number can now be changed from the Software     e The IXP200 Software is now deployed with Java JRE 1 4 2_13  which  supports Daylight Savings changes that will be effective from March 2007 in  the US  Canada  and elsewhere  NOTE  7he Windows Operating System  must also include the appropriate patches for this to be effective     vi    vii    NETWORK AND COMPUTER SECURITY
107. P200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics       e Clicking on the Open Doors option will cause the Emergency  Open  Close All Doors dialog shown below to be displayed     F   EMERGENCY OPEN CLOSE DOORS E x     Set the status of doors as required      3  Close All               Emergency Open  Close All Doors dialog    In this dialog  proceed as follows       1  To open all doors   click Open All  this immediately unlocks all the doors  and leaves them open indefinitely      2  To close all doors   click Close All  this immediately locks all the doors  the  System will then revert back to the Door Pattern set for that period      3  To open selected doors only  click on the appropriate Door Icons  to show  an open icon  Click Apply to open or close the doors as indicated by the  icons  or click Cancel to refresh the current door status as given by the  Controller      4  Click OK to close the window     Remote Reader Options Menu    Right clicking on a Remote Reader icon will cause a menu to be displayed  showing the options for that unit     The Options Menu for a Remote Reader provides the following options     a  Details   b  Open Door   c  Close Door        d  Monitor Door                     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  132  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics        1  Clicking on the Details option will display t
108. PARATE SERVER  15          BackUp IE TE  Re enr dl nn a nr ns drame d en den ne eii  GETTING STARTED  Upgrading an Existing IXP200 Database    15  Communications  Controller to Host PC   15  STARTING UP THE IXP200 SYSTEM   ooocoococcccccccnononannnnnonnnnnnnnnnn corn rnnrarnnnnnannranno 16  Initial Operations union rai inc 17  TROUBLESHOOTING sure ir ip e de eevee 17  IB CONSOLE   DATABASE ADMINISTRATION UTILITY              17  Register Vera iba iia inde 17  CHANGING PASSWORD OR ADDING ANOTHER USER    18  Changing  the Password  melon Er A AE 18  Adding Another User    19  REGISTER DATABASE  OPTIONAL  conoocccocnccccocccnnnnnnnonononnnnnnn nn no rnrr cnn nn nn nr 19  SR o a ONA EE AEO a N EA 19  DI AGRAMS  Figure 1   Installation introductory screen    9     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2 5    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     SECTION 2   SOFTWARE INSTALLATION  INTRODUCTION    This Section describes the installation procedure for the IXP200 System Software     The IXP200 System Software is a single  or multi user access control System using  the ImproX range of hardware  It is designed for use with Windows 98 Second  Edition   2000  NT SP6a  or XP Professional    NOTE    For limitations on the use of Windows 98  see Operating System  ater  in this Section     This Software is supplied on the  XP200 System Software CDROM   DATE  TIME FORMATS    All dates and times in the IXP200 System are entered and displayed in ISO  Standar
109. PB allows each Tagholder one entry  to  reset their APB status     FN Reset Anti Passback x     2  Press OK to set neutral APB status for all tags in all zones    Cancel            Reset Anti Passback Dialog    To Reset APB proceed as follows     1  Click on Hardware on the toolbar     2  Select Reset Anti Passback from the dropdown menu     3  The Reset Anti Passback Dialog above is displayed to confirm if APB  must be set to a neutral status    Emergency Open Doors    This function is provided for emergencies where people are required to leave  the building immediately   e g  if there is a fire in the building  without          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  137  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other System Operations       presenting their Tags at the doors  The status of individual doors is displayed  so that they can be closed or opened     WAEMERGENCY OPEN CLOSE DOORS  x   Setthe status of doors as required    Close All                         E main Door  E Lifts  E Rear Door    E Laboratory                Emergency Open  Close Doors Dialog    Emergency Open  Close Doors   Procedure    To select Emergency Open Close Doors  proceed as follows       1  Click on Hardware on the toolbar and select Emergency Open Doors  from the dropdown menu  The Emergency Open  Close Doors Dialog  similar to that shown above is displayed      2  To open all doors   click Open All  this imme
110. PC  the PC running the IXP200 application   Click Go     NOTE   f you are viewing the Reports on the Host PC  start the Web Browser       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 7  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       and type the address http   localhost  index html and click Go    3  A log on dialog will be displayed if Web Reports password is enabled    4  The Web Reports for IXP200 screen shown will be displayed                          3 Web Reports Main Page   Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 le  xj     File Edit View Favorites Tools Help         back         at   Qsearch  Favorites CAHistory  B E      Address   http    localhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports  WebMainPage FA    Go    inks Ej  7    Web Reports Main Page    Administrator Reports Person Information Reports         Archive Selecter   Hours Worked in APB Zones Report    Configuration Reports Person Access Pattern Report          M  Person Report A  y    Zone Occupancy Report    Transaction Reports General System Reports    Access Report   Holiday Report    Alarm Report Reason Code Report       Status Report    el    BE Local intranet  Web Reports for   XP200 Main Page  DEFINING PARAMETERS IN A REPORT PAGE        1  Once a Report page has been accessed  it is generally necessary to define  the required parameters  Typically  this means      2  Select the item of interest by clicking on its title or making a selection from  a com
111. Pattern    Start Time   Start time of this Access Pattern  hh   mm     End time   End time of this Access Pattern  hh   mm     Duration   Duration of this Access Pattern  automatically  calculated       2  In the Select Day Pattern field  click on the required weekday buttons to  select the day pattern  The selected buttons change to light blue     3  In the Start Time field  enter the time in hours  00 to 24  and minutes   00 to 59  to enable this time pattern     4  In the End Time field  enter the time in hours  00 to 24  and minutes   00 to 59  to enable this time pattern           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  86  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups       NOTE  The Duration field remains permanently gray  The System calculates  the hours and minutes  00 00  as you enter the Start and End times           x   Day  amp  Time   Door  Floor     Select Day Pattern        Sun Sat   Hol       Start Time    07 00    EndTime  19 00 Duration   12 00       Typical Access Pattern Day  amp  Time Details     5  Click on the Door tab  the Access Pattern   Door Tab Dialog as shown  below is displayed  In the No Access Doors field  all the doors of the  building that have been entered are listed      6  Select the required doors  and then click Add to transfer them to the Access  Doors field     ARES Pattern Setting  x   Day amp Time Door  Floor     Access Doors  No Access Doors  
112. Repeat for all Tags for this Tagholder  if required            This concludes the configuration of Tags and Tagholders              June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page    3 112    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 8   Holidays       CHAPTER 8   HOLIDAYS CONFI GURATI ON    General     a      f     This System allows for a maximum of 20 holiday dates to be entered by the  user     All holidays must have start and end dates   Doors may operate in a specific mode during holidays     After the holiday   s end date is reached  the doors would then revert to their  normal mode as defined by their day mode pattern     This feature is designed for schools and institutions  where at the end of a  period  term   the doors must automatically change to the special mode     Furthermore access can also be specifically defined for holidays     NOTE  7o allow same day holidays to be automatic year after year  the    holiday has no year field     The next item to be configured is a Holiday  To access the Holiday Panel  click  onthe   Icon     101    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help             Holiday       Name Start Date End Date  li  New Year 01 January lot January     Christmas 125 December  26 December       Ojea  ARE    Transactions   Alarms                  Seq Date Time Terminal Event Name Tag  5 vB COM  Holiday Panel     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject
113. STRATION INTERFACE AND READERS  scccccccr 7  MULTI FUNCTION TERMINALS ii 8  WIEGAND READERS rr 252 Guzen etait rennes chan tendre ananas de   t nef hate Eci 9  OTHER READER Susini aio  9  SYSTEM  INFORMATION einean ada de 12  System ECU ee diari a aida an dia te 12  Compatible Registration Readers       oooicniniconocccnncanononnnan cnc nono nar canaria canon 13  Compatible Tag Types      ccoocononoconnnncncnnnncnnnanonnnnononcnnnnnnnnnn cnn rre renannnnnnnnos 13  O 14  Mods ica daran 14  Power Coli a 14  AlarmiArMINQ A E heads te NS AT 14  Alarmi Arming   Relay 2 58 oi an haiei dh sian 15  O riies panes yeas a Gavia ie sedate TE 15  When Mi sna ES Lt Sn te NEL 15  ACCESS CONTROL sticks  of Re ea Sal otha ore tants 16  DOOrs and   ZONES vicina canteens eaves denice cayenne aes 17  Door Mode Pattern sir shoes em tn nn dada eas 17  Lift  elevator  Control    17  ACCESS GlOUDS ctm tn tities deans ann ikea ge dame tan inet  17  Addressing  Scheme zx ie sn ste tada 17  Architecture   System PCs    18  Graphics Software  sense errant tristes ondaa 20  TABLES  Table 1   Control and Input Output Units 2 0 0    cece eeeeeee eee eeteeeeteneaaeaeeeeeeee  Table 2   125 kHz  Terminals  Group 1    nes  Table 3  125 kHz Remote Readers for Group 1 Terminals                                             Table 4   Multi mode  Mifare      FeliCa  Remote Readers  Group 1     3 Terminals        Table 5   125 kHz Terminals  Group 2     Table 6   125 kHz Antenna Readers for Group 2 Terminals         
114. TION  system     An ImproX hardware unit with a Fixed  Address and a Logical Address  The  Operator must assign the unit to an Access  Control Point     Impro supplied chart for use during  installation of the hardware     A person who has been assigned a Tag  and an Access Group     A physically bounded area containing one  or more Doors  for the purposes of anti   passback management     MEANING  Anti passback   Graphic User Interface   Internet Protocol   Infra red   Original Equipment Manufacturer   Radio frequency   Super Logical Address   Ultra High Frequency           June 2007 Impro Technologies    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 7    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 7 8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 7   Glossary of Terms       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 7 9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 7   Glossary of Terms       USER   S NOTES                   k  Custman    XP200           IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 sys swm en 12 Section 7 doc     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 7 10    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12          XP200  Software User Manual    SECTION 8    APPENDICES    Section 8   Appendices       IXP200 Software User Manual   
115. TS    The various Transaction Reports are selected from the Web Reports Main Page  by clicking on the title of the report required     Common Report Screen Buttons    Each Report screen in this group includes two common buttons  The operation  of these buttons is as follows      e Click on Submit to update the displayed Report information     e Click on Export Report  CSV  to export the displayed Report in CSV   Comma Separated Value  format for MS Excel and similar programs                                   Access Report   zex     Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea     Back    gt     amp           Search CFavortes CAHistory   Eh  E      Address fel http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports AccessReport y     Go    Links  5  Access Report    Return to the Web Reports Main page    Main Filters    Date from 2003 07 17 Ts  to   2003 07 17 El  Daily Time from   00 00 00 to  23 59 59  24 Hour Clock     Person   Location   z   Other Filters   F Department   Tag No      I Event Type  I Reason Code     Date Filter   2003 07 17 to 2003 07 17  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59     E  Done kaii  53 Local intranet  Access Report with no filter selected          Access Reports can provide various details of access transactions within the  System  The type of information required in an Access Report can be defined by  selecting one or more types of filter  The filters permit selection of information  in the categories described in the next few paragraphs        
116. USB    Registration  Reader          1  Place the Tag at the registration device and then click Read Tag  The  Tag s number is then displayed in the Number field  and the Type is  displayed in the Type field      2  The Type field is usually automatically read and displayed  Some Tag types  cannot be read by any of the registration devices  see Registering UHF  Tags  Registering Finger Prints as Tags  Registering Personal  Access Codes  PACs  as Codes and Support for Devices using  Wiegand Tag Codes later in this manual   For these Tags  select the Type  manually from the dropdown list to correspond with the Tag used     NOTE  Additionally  neither the ProxPal nor the 1XP200 Controller is able to  read Mifare Tags  and Mifare Registration Readers are not able to  read standard 125 kHz Tags  In this case  however  the correct  reader types must be included in the IXP200 System  The Type field  cannot be used to resolve this situation     Register the Tag    The registration processes for Tag types that cannot be registered via any of  the registration devices are described in the following paragraphs  Once a Tag is  registered  proceed to the heading Tag Registration   Further Steps           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 101  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders             Registering UHF Tags    4 Channel UHF Tags  ImproX RF Tags  cannot be read directly as a UHF Tag  ty
117. User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       GENERAL SYSTEM REPORTS  Holiday Report         File Edit view Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      A A  Search Favorites meda  9   Eh    G  Address      http    fiocalhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports  HolidayReport    PG  Links  gt     Holiday Calendar for 2003                   Return to the Web Reports Main page    Select View     Table    Calendar    E ES  Holiday Report   Calendar format    This Report shows the Holidays defined during the configuration process     If the cursor is positioned over a holiday  a hand icon will be displayed together  with the name of the holiday     The default report format is in the form of a calendar as shown above  When  Calendar format is selected  the CSV Export option is not available     Select the Table button to change to table format  see next illustration   In this  format the CSV Export is available     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  41    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Z  Holiday Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer El  File Edit View Favorites Tools Help      Back     gt    O A A  search Egravorites  meda   B Sy                   Address ja http  localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports HolidayReport     Go  Links 2                                                                   A    Holiday Calendar for 2003 N    Submit   Expor Rep
118. ablish which  units need to be upgraded     Comms Test    The Comms Test is used to test communications with one unit at a time on the  Controller and Terminal busses     The options described in the following paragraphs are available for the Comms  Test facility           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       No  of cycles    The number of test cycles may be set as required  Up to 9 cycles may be  selected  This facility is   typically used whenan intermittent communications  fault is suspected     Unit CLA  The CLA  Logical Address  of the required unit must be entered   Test  std     A Standard Test sends a group of messages to  and receives responses from   each Terminal  and reports a percenTage pass rate  A pass rate of less than  100  indicates a communications problem     Test  adv     An Advanced Test is used in Systems that include items such as RF modems  or etherpads with longer response timeouts     Reset    This performs a soft reset of the System  similar to a power up reset   MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES    4  Firmware Upgrade E 101 xl    File Config File Versions Help    Firmware Upgrade   System Tools   Misc                     Set Logical Address Clear Controller Memory   8 Controller    Terminal ControllerLA 01  Fixed Address  7 AN Controllers  Logical Address  01  01     OK OK    Set Default Message  ControllerLA  
119. al     Integer is a whole number in the range  2 billion to  2 billion   Smallint is a whole number in the range  32768 to  32767     Varchar means a variable length character field  not greater than the  maximum length specified in brackets  The data can be a mix of alphabetic and  numeric characters  Trying to enter a value longer than the max length will  cause an error     PK means Primary Key  This is the sequential and unique number allocated to  the record in the Database and serves as the primary means of maintaining  sequence and access to that record  Trying to enter a record with a primary  key which already exists in the table will cause an error  Hence the danger of  importing Master records into a mature Database     FK means Foreign Key and implies that this number is used in a different Table  as the Primary Key    MST_SQ is the primary key  PK  in the MASTER Table and is also used in the  TAG Table as a foreign key  FK  to identify the Tag holder    DPT_NO is the primary key  PK  in the DEPARTMENT Table and is also used in  the MASTER Table as a foreign key  FK  to identify the department   Department number may be omitted from the MASTER record but if it is used it  must be defined in the DEPARTMENT Table  Hence the Department table must  be imported first           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  12  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12           Section 5   Utilities Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility       REQUIRE
120. al  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals       ARAN ral ES    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help             10 Terminals Channel settings     j Output Name  10 Terminal   Biog Management 01010108   Output   Search   i    Terminal Setting    Name  Bldg Management  Usage  Normal Output     Duration  10  0 18                                               el 210    _seg   Date   Time Terminal Event Name   Tag         fo DB COM    Output Terminal configured for Building Management     1  In the Channel Setting window  select a cell and name the Output  channels  as they have been physically connected e g  if using the Lift   elevator  function  as in this example   enter the floor number or name of  the floor  Marketing   Up to 16 Floors can be entered   The example caters  for four floors       2  Click Apply to save the data or Cancel to reject it     NOTES     1  Where more than one Lift  elevator  Controller System is used  the lift   elevator  buttons must be connected to the output relays in exactly the  same order in each lift  elevator   Each lift  elevator  can access the same  16 floors   not 4 x 16 floors     2  The software automatically synchronises the output channels for multiple  lift  elevator  Controllers    3  Editing channels of one Output Terminal selected for Lift  elevator  Control  changes the data in all the other Lift  elevator  Control units           June 2007 Impro Technolog
121. al 016 Terminals may be added for Lift  elevator   control  with 1 additional Reader per Lift  elevator   up to a maximum of 4 Lifts          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 18  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview        elevators  and 16 floors  A Tag can be given access to selected floors  or to all  16 floors     NOTE    This figure refers to single address Terminals  Some Terminals have  two adaresses  if these types are used the total possible number of  Terminals is reduced in proportion     The IXP200 Software communicates with the IXP200 Controller via an RS232  serial port or USB port  The IXP200 Controller may also act as a Reader for Tag  registration  that is  to enter new Tags in the database   except in Systems  equipped with Multi mode  i e  Mifare FeliCa  Readers      Registration Read    The ImproX RS Registration Interface provides USB to RS485 conversion  which  permits the IXP200 Controller to be installed up to 1 km  0 62 miles  from the  Host PC  ImproX IR Tags can be registered using the ImproX RS     The ImproX RS must be used with an ImproX RRA  for 125 kHz Tags  or  ImproX RRM  for Mifare or FeliCa Tags      NOTES     1  An IXP200 System can continue to operate if the Host PC is  disconnected from the  XP200 Controller  either deliberately or due to  a fault The  XP200 System then operates as a standalone System   Transaction data is recorded in the IXP200 Controller database
122. alled to C  1XP200  which is a typical situation     NOTE  7he Software must be installed on the Local Host PC  the PC that  communicates with the Controller  It can also be installed on the hard  drive of another PC in the same network as the Local Host where this  second PC is used as an Editing Workstation  The Database Management  System can also be installed on a separate Database Server PC in the  network     NOTE    f an older version of the Software exists on the drive  be sure to use  Windows Add Remove Programs to uninstall this older version before  installing the new version     The database file    proxette gdb    or    proxette fdb    will not be removed by this  process  and also will not be over written when the new Software is installed   Log on Requirements    If you are using Windows NT or Windows 2000  you will need to log on with  Administrator privileges on the machine     NOTE  Before running setup files  quit all other applications   Database Type    IXP200 requires a Database Server to be installed    e Versions prior to V4 0 of the IXP200 Software used InterBase     e Version V4 0 and higher support the Firebird database Software  This  database is supplied free of charge with the Software     e Version V5 0 and higher use the Jaybird driver instead of the InterClient  driver     INTERBASE MUST BE REMOVED to allow version V4 0 or higher to be  installed correctly  From V5 0 on  I nterClient must also be removed     To do this       1  First stop all 
123. anel before clicking on the Holiday Panel s  Apply button  would result in the all new entries being rejected      5           NOTE  7o quit the calendar window without choosing a date press the escape  button on the keyboard     The start and expiry date can be deleted by highlighting the date and  pressing the Delete button on the keyboard     Editing an Existing Holiday  To Edit a Holiday  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Holiday icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu      2  Double click on the holiday to be edited  and then select the appropriate  procedures above to complete the editing     Deleting an Existing Holiday    To Delete a Holiday  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Holiday icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu      2  Select the required name to be deleted in the Holiday Panel  and then  click Delete to remove the Holiday from the System            This concludes the configuration of Holidays              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 116  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 9   Messages       CHAPTER 9   MESSAGES CONFI GURATI ON    General    This panel allows the user to enter and store up to 255 Messages  each with a  maximum of 64 characters  These Messages can be entered into and deleted  from the System at any time     A Message can be linked to a particular Tagholder to be displayed on the 
124. anted Door Forced transactions occurring          June 2007 Impro Technologies    Page 6 29  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       when the RTE pushbutton is used to open the door     When RTE Latch is enabled RTE access transactions will also be suppressed by  the Controller                    lt  Settings  gt     To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus       Options      RTE Latch  la  Door 1 Name   Door Name Door 2  Name     e   E  F5       Door 16  Name       RTE Mode    TL 5 dH         RTE Mode Options    Latch Enabled Latch Disabled    CS X Latch Enabled       Y          Option Selected           DD   gt  Store new data                   RTE menu vsd  0     gt  Refresh old data      Y                      RTE Latch Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   30  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Details of the use of the Sagem Fingerprint Readers are included in the IXP  System compatible Biometric Reader manual  Interconnections are also shown    in the that manual     INDEX  access  5  10  15  16  30  Access Group  15  19  23  Add Edit  9  13  14  15  Administrator  5  10  13  14  16  23   24  alarm system  28  Alphanumeric entry  8  blinking cursor  8  Comms Port Setting  10  communications  25  29  Controller  5  7  8  9  10  15  24  25   28  30  Database  5  delete any tag  13  Door Entry Codes  21  Door Forced  29  Doo
125. apter 3   Door Configuration       Cancel   This button refreshes the data with the original data   Configuring Doors and Readers Procedures    To configure Doors and Readers  first refer to the ImproX Unit Location Chart  for the required data  and then proceed as follows       1  Click the Doors Readers icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu  The Doors and Readers Panel similar to that shown  above is displayed  For a new site the list is empty      2  This panel defaults to the Door Tab Panel  as shown above      3  Click Add     in the top pane  The System allocates a number and the  new entry area is highlighted under the No  and Name fields      4  In the middle pane select the Name field  and type in the required  description  The description should be appropriate and unique  ensure that  the description is not confused with other descriptions     NOTE  The first thing to decide is whether the door is an actual Door or a Lift   elevator  Control point  If the latter  click the check box to select Lift   elevator  Door  Four Readers  one per lift  elevator   may then be  assigned to the lift  elevator  control point  loosely referred to as a    Lift   elevator  Door        For normal Doors only two Readers  one for entry  one for exit  may  be assigned      5  The next step depends on whether a normal Door or a Lift Door is being  configured       a  For normal Doors continue with this procedure  Step 6       b  For a Lift  elevator  Door co
126. are  The basics are briefly described for first time users  and very  important information that can save a lot of time is included     NOTE   t is recommended that the user read this thoroughly before  attempting translations     The Basics    The IXP200 Software can be translated into any language provided the  computer supports that character set     To begin translation       1  Start the IXP200 program in either online or offline mode  with SYSDBA  password      2  From the File menu  select the Choose Locale option and make sure the  language and country settings are correct     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  143  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 14   Translation       A Locale Chooser x        Language es  Spanish pS    Country SPAIN  ES he    Variant e      Cancel   Ok         Locale Chooser Panel     3  A Locale Chooser Panel similar to that shown above is displayed   Choose a Locale    It is very important that the correct Locale settings are chosen before beginning  the translation  When the Choose Locale dialog first appears  it shows the  default locale of the System  For instance  typical values may show that the  language is French  and the country is France     There is also a field called Variant  that is optional and by default is null  In  most cases it is best to change the country field to None  and leave the variant  field as none  thereby
127. are do you want to install  SY    Select the type of hardware you want to install     Hardware types           Display adapters   IDE ATA ATAPI controllers  IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers     Imaging devices   29  Infrared devices   ZS Memory technology driver    Re  Modems a    SM hd ltisnort carial adantare          Hardware Type Screen   12  Scroll down to find Other Devices     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information          Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Hardware Type DR   What type of hardware do you want to install  RS    Select the type of hardware you want to install     Hardware types           3 NT Apm Legacy Support a  Other        Y PCMCIA adapters   3 Ports  COM  amp  LPT    Gf Pinters      SCSI and RAID controllers   g  Sound  video and game controllers    E System devices  ET ana drivas     EY 1          Add  Remove Hardware screen     13  Select Other Devices        Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Select a Device Driver E  Which driver do you want to install for this device  SS       Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Next  If you  have a disk that contains the driver pou want to install  click Have Disk     Manufacturers  Models     Standard Dual Channel PCI IDE Controller  Standard IDE ESDI Hard Disk Controller           Standard Modem Types    Standard port t
128. as the ability to read Tags but  cannot communicate directly with a  Controller  A Remote Reader must be  connected to a suitable ImproX Terminal   typically the ImproX DT or PT units  in  order to be able to communicate with the  associated system Controller     Some Remote Readers have keypads     All Remote Readers include an antenna  and associated electronics     Some devices  such as the ImproX Infrared  Receiver and the ImproX RF UHF Receiver  are connected into a system in the same  way as Remote Readers     A separate PC  connected to the same  network as the Host PC  which can be used  to store the database     A Site consists of one Host PC  optionally  with a Database Server  and associated  ImproX units  An Editing Workstation PC is  optional      See Site and SLA     See Super Logical Address      A hardware unit  Terminal  under the  control of another hardware unit   Controller            June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 5    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM  Strict Anti Passback  Super Logical Address    System    Tag  Tagholder    Access Group    Tag Level    Terminal    Terminal Bus    Terminal Name    Time Triggered Action    EXPLANATION  See Anti Passback   Strict     The Logical Address format which totally  defines the unique address of a unit in a  system  This has the form  01010101    Site Host Controller Terminal  i e  2 digits  each      An IXP200 Access ins
129. ated  with the Server      4  Select Users and the list of users will be displayed in the right hand pane   Then follow the appropriate sequence described below     Changing the Password  To change the password       1  Right click an existing User Name displayed in the right hand pane    2  Select Modify User from the pop up menu  The User Information Dialog will          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  18  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        now be displayed    3  Change the password    4  Confirm the change by entering the password again in the second box    5  Click Apply to save the new password    6  Click Close to exit     Adding Another User    To add another User     1  Right click any User Name displayed in the right hand pane      2  Select Add User from the pop up menu  The User Information Dialog is  now displayed      3  Enter a User Name and Password     4  Confirm the new Password by entering it again    5  Click Apply to save new User     6  Click Close to exit     NOTE    XP200 makes provision for another User to have limited access to the  Database  to allocate Visitor Tags with low security access and to obtain  reports  This User should have the User Name    OPERATOR    and  Password    impro     Create this User if required  otherwise the only user  would be the Administrator User  No other user has access to the tables     REGISTER DATABASE  OPTI ONAL     It is necessary to register the Database in ord
130. attern         1   Default Tag Mode  _2 Weekday  3 Holiday   4 Weekend             Pattern Name   Default Tag Mode    Pattern Time Slot      End Time Mode    PIN  Reason    Dual Tag   Record Denied Alarm   LED      No  o No  Yes  No Red            1  00 00  24 00  Tag          Transactions   Alarms      Date it Terminal          rs AAA    Door Mode Pattern Panel    Door Mode Pattern Tab  No    Door mode Pattern number   Pattern Name   The name given to the Door Mode pattern   Add       Allows a new pattern to be created   Delete       This button removes the selected entry from the  list   Pattern Time   This pane provides details of each slot in the current  Slot Door Mode Pattern   NOTES      1  The Start Time is allocated automatically to match the end time of the  previous Time Slot  default is 00 00      2  The required End Time for a new Slot must be typed in     3  All other parameters are selected from combo boxes  which are available  once the slot has been created        No    Time Slot number allocated by the System  1 8  maximum       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 47    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       Start Time  End Time    Mode      PIN      Reason     Dual Tag  Record  Denied Alarm    LED    Apply    Cancel    Starting time of the Time Slot in hours and minutes   hh   mm      End time of the Time Slot in hours and minutes  hh    mm     The
131. ay  23  24  38  49  57  67   RTE Mode  38   serial port  18  19  25  26  27   shortcut Icons  6   site  33  54  59  65  69    Special Modes  49   start date  28   Status Bar  9  19   Supervisor tag  24   Supervisor Unlock Mode  48  49   system database  20  27  59   Tag Mode  48  49  54   time  10  11  18  19  20  27  28   29  37  38  43  44  46  47  48   49  55  56  63  64  65  66  67   68  69  71   Time and Attendance  37   time slot  49   Time Slot  46  47  48  49  54  56   Time Triggered Action  64  65  67   Transactions  9  46  48  49   user  5  6  9  16  18  20  35  44   46  49  54   Windows  20   Zone  24  26  32  34  35  42  49    USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 3 73    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 74  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 75  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       USER   S NOTES       k  Custman   XP200  English Manuals     ME SARS     sera June 2007 IXP200_System swm en 12 Section 3A  doc                            June 2007 Impro Technol
132. bo box as required     3  Define the time period for the report by typing in the required dates     4  Click Submit to display the required information     5  Once the report is displayed  some report columns can be sorted by clicking  on the required column heading  To determine which columns can be  sorted  move the cursor across the column headings  The columns which  can be sorted will be indicated by a hand icon        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 8  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       EXPORTING REPORTS TO EXCEL    A Report may be exported to CSV  Comma Separated Values  format and then  opened by Excel  This is easily done as follows       a  Click the button    Export Report  CSV  once the required report screen is  displayed      b  Supply a filename and path when prompted  to save the report to a CSV  file     REPORT DESCRI PTI ONS    The reports which can be generated by the System are described below  with  details provided  where necessary  about navigating through each type of  report     ADMI NI STRATOR REPORTS    Administrator Reports cover Archives and System Configuration  The  Configuration information is only accessible to the database Administrator using  the correct log on name and password     Archive Selector    The Archive Selector allows you to view archived databases   To access this     1  Click on Archive Selector in the Main Page      2  Select the database you wish to v
133. change without notice Page 5  10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility       CHAPTER 3   CSV IMPORTER UTILITY  GENERAL    The CSV Import Utility enables the User to import a CSV  Comma Separated  Value  file into a Database     NOTE   t is suggested that this Utility be used ONLY when first loading a new  System and if the User has previous Database files such as may be  created by Access  Dbase and similar     CAUTION  Before executing the Import program  ensure that no  other programs are loaded and running     CAUTION  This procedure should only be used by competent  Information Technology personnel  Before implementing  any of the possible Import procedures  the User should be  in contact with the service and maintenance personnel     This is not a utility that should be used more than once per table and should not  be used on a mature Database unless some very specific  and advanced   procedures are followed  The Database consists of a very large number of  Tables  These Tables are preloaded empty tables when the System is first  installed  While the System is being configured  the Tables are updated with  various data the User provides during configuration     NOTE  7he  mporter will usually be used after the software has been loaded  and the site and Terminals configured  Then the CSV Importer enables  the user to add the pertinent user data     For the above reasons the source CSV File must be carefully prepa
134. d    Trigger Time   Time that an Action must be triggered  on the    hh mm  selected day    Action   Select Action Type   The type of Action that will occur at the trigger  time    Parameters   Displays a dialog box to further define the Action    Apply   Accepts the new data into the Systems database    Cancel   Cancels a new entry or refreshes an existing one     CONFI GURI NG TI ME TRI GGERED ACTIONS   PROCEDURE    To configure a Time Triggered Action  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Actions icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu  A Time Triggered Action Panel similar to that shown  above is displayed  For a new site the list is empty     2  Click Add  this clears the Time Triggered Action cell  click in the cell and  type in the name for the new Time Action      3  In the Time of Operation panel  proceed as follows       a  Click on the buttons in the Days of Week field to select the required  days           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 65  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions        b  Click in the Trigger Time field cells to set the time  hh mm  that the  Action must be triggered      4  In the Action field  click on the arrow button and select the required Action   namely Relay or Message     5  Click Parameters  A dialog box appropriate to the Action selected will be  displayed  Refer to either  a  or  b     a
135. d Date and Time in the dialog  displayed  Click Apply to save      11  Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or Cancel to reject  any new data     NOTE  Changing to another panel before selecting Apply on the Controller  Panel would result in the new data being rejected     Daylight Saving    The Daylight Saving feature allows the Controller to be set up for Daylight  Saving  summer time      Once it is set up it will operate the time switch over even when the Controller is  off line  that is it will reset the time by the offset on the specified start date and  time and switch it back again on the specified end date and time     However  the PC time will still override the Controller time when it is on line   The PC relies on the operating System  O S  for the correct time and will upload  it to the Controller every 5 minutes  The O S generally knows the dates for  which Daylight Saving applies  and switches over automatically  Of course if the  Operating System time is incorrect  then it will make the Controller time  incorrect too  as soon as it comes on line     NOTE  Daylight Saving dates are set for a particular year and must be reset  each year     To activate Daylight Saving  select Apply Daylight Savings  Yes on the  Controller configuration screen   The Daylight Saving dialog shown will be displayed      amp  set Daylight Saving for Controller x     Time Offset   01 00         Start Date 2002 03 24 Start Time   2 00  End Date 2002 09 22 x  End Time   2 
136. d Format  Dates   yyyy mm dd  and Times hh mm ss      NETWORK AND COMPUTER SECURITY          CAUTION    The security of the network and the computers on which the software is installed  remains the responsibility of the customer  If the computer on which the system is  installed is compromised  or the network is compromised  then it may become  possible to make unauthorized modifications to the configuration of the system  and  physical security may be breached     It is strongly recommended that the latest security updates are obtained and  applied on a regular basis to all computers on which any component of the system  is running     Physical access to the computers running the system must also be controlled  to  ensure that access by unauthorized persons does not occur              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  6  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        IXP200 SYSTEM SOFTWARE I NSTALLATI ON INSTRUCTIONS  Installation procedure when using a single  Host  PC    General    If older versions of the Software exist on the drive  be sure to Uninstall these first   having first made a backup copy of the database file    proxette fdb         proxette  properties    and    graphics properties        Computer Hardware    An IXP200 System can use one  two or three PCs  These are     The Host PC   this PC is always required  The System Software is installed on this  PC     A Server PC   the System Database can be installed on this seco
137. d Thu   Fri Sat   Hol StartTime   Duration Access Door Access  1 Admin   1 EREREREE 08 00  1200hrs 1 2 6  1 2 3 4   2   Lebstar   1       jell 0700  1200hrs   1 2 3 4 6    2        x   0800   0400 hrs 3 4 6   3   Supervisor   1      Pa  oe  oe  oe  oe  o   00  2400h   1 2 3 45 6    23 41                                   Return to the Configuration main page       E Local intranet    E    Access Group Configuration Report    This report shows the Access Groups defined for the System with the time and  place for which access is allowed for each group     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  13  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Door Access Configuration Report    Z  Door Access Configuration    Microsoft Internet Explorer   8 x   File Edit View Favorites Tools Help      Back    gt       2  A  search Gyravorites   meda   ES  Sy    Address ja http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports Doors  ccessConfigReport    Go   Links  gt      Door Access Configuration                     Export Report  CSV  sy          Return to the Configuration main page    Door   Car Park  Amount of people allowed   6    Accounts Door One ESS Pe ee   i          Car Paik John Walton    Laboratory James Nigel      min 08 00  a PER Haines  Lifts    Main Door          Clara Calisto   Supervisor       William Newton   Supervisor  Juliet  Summerfield  Arturo Fettucini   Supervisor          Rear 
138. d to a large database system such as the  XP200  Access Control Software     This introduction is not intended to teach the Reader how Windows works  but  rather to introduce the concepts as they apply to the Access System and  thereby help to ensure proper use of the System     Graphic User I nterface    The first concept to grasp is that of the GUI  pronounced    gooey      the Graphical  User Interface  This is illustrated above  The arrow  representing the    mouse      rests on a graphic representation marked    Shortcut to Engine     Such a graphic is  also called an    icon    because the graphic is    live     In other words  the graphic  enables the computer to do something   to carry out a command  The classical  definition of an icon is     A small symbolic picture of a physical object that  represents a particular option and can be selected to exercise that option              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 3  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       In Windows  almost all commands are exercised through icons as this is the  quickest way of selecting a task and activating it  The operator does not have  to type nor remember obscure details  or the procedure which make these  programs work     IP ADDRESS  The IP  Internet Protocol  address is crucial to the operation of the database    and the System as a whole  The IP address is the address of the Server
139. days at a given time     Event Triggered Actions  An Event Triggered Action will take place during a specified monitoring period  on specific days  if a specified Input or Inputs switches to a specified state     The 116 Terminal inputs are individually monitored to determine if an Event has  occurred  Once the monitoring period has started  the System continuously polls  the inputs for a change of state     Time  Event Panel Fields and Buttons  Below is a brief description of the information that is displayed in all the Time  Triggered Action Panel s fields and what the buttons  functions are     The next item to be configured is the Time Event Triggered Actions        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  64  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       To access the Time Event Triggered Actions  Panel click on the    Icon     Time Triggered Actions Tab   Time Triggered   Description of the currently selected Action    Action   Delete       Allows the selected entry in the pane below to be  removed    Add       Allows a new entry to be created     Table or list of defined Time Triggered Actions    Number   The Action number    Description   The Action Description    Trigger Time   The time at which the Action will be triggered    Time of Operation  for the currently selected Action    Days of week    Mon  Tues etc  Days selected for the Action to be  triggere
140. ddressing allows the IP address to be configured  automatically  This method decreases administration time and allows the  reuse of IP addresses  It is recommended for all sizes of networks that do  not have a direct Internet connection or the DHCP service available     2  Static IP addressing allows you to manually enter a permanent IP address   Using this method is not recommended except as a last resort     3  Ifa DHCP service js later found  the computer stops using the automatic IP  address and uses the IP address assigned by the DHCP service  A DHCP IP  address will not override a static  permanent manually entered   see  above  IP address  The new  valid DHCP address will have to be manually  entered           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 5  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       4 If a computer is moved from a local area network  LAN  with a DHCP  service to a LAN without a DHCP service  you can use the IP configuration  utility  WINIPCFG  to release the assigned DHCP address  You can then  have the computer automatically assign a private IP address     IP Configuration    To use the IP configuration  WI NI PCFG  utility   1  Click Start  and then click Run    2  In the Open box  type   winipcfg   3  Click More Info      4  To see the addresses of the DNS servers the computer is configured to use   click the ellipsis       button to the right of DNS Serv
141. ders  gt   To from Settings Menu      Add Edit  To from Delete Menu         Add Edit l   0000  Options    Walton All Tagholders         Add Edit    L  Suspend  To from other Add Edit  Menus      Add Edit     Name  To from other Add Edit    Menus         Add Edit eines  Ween 16 character Name  0 9 x   Ey X                   Name  VD Store new data                        X   gt   Refresh old data        T    Name menu vsd                      Name Menu       O June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 17  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Level Menu    This menu permits the selection of a Tag Level for the selected Tagholder      lt   Tagholders  gt              Add Edit   0000   Walton      Add Edit   Suspend       Add Edit   Level       Add Edit   Level   Normal    EF 4    To from Settings Menu    To from Delete Menu       Options    All Tagholders       To from other Add Edit  Menus    To from other Add Edit  Menus       Options    Visitor  Normal    CS V xX Supervisor    AA       Administrator             Level S    elected           Y   gt   Store new data             Level menu vsd             X   gt  Refresh old data y                   Level Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 6 18    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Access Group Menu    This menu permits any available Access Group to be allocated to the selected    Tagholder          lt 
142. dialog          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  107  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        6  Remove the card from the printer  and then read it in to the System and  allocate it to the Tagholder as described previously under    Register the  Tag        Printing Directly onto Tags    CAUTION  To print directly onto a Tag  a special printer is required   DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRINT DIRECTLY ONTO A TAG  USING A NORMAL PRINTER AS DAMAGE TO THE CARD  AND THE PRI NTER MAY RESULT     Saving the Tagholder Record    Click Apply to accept the record for the new Tagholder  or click Cancel to  reject the record or refresh data for an existing Tagholder  This returns to the  Tagholder Panel  where the new Tagholder data is displayed     Printing onto Adhesive Labels    To print onto adhesive labels  a standard commercial inkjet or laser printer can  be used  Follow the printer manufacturer s instructions  and the procedure given  under Printing Procedure   Batch Printing     Cards printed from some other PC    If the number of cards you need to print does not justify the purchase  of a special printer  but you want to print directly onto Tags  your  Impro Distributor may offer a printing service     Printing Procedure   Batch Printing    Batch printing can be used to print either adhesive labels for several cards  or a  group of card Tags     When Batch Printing is to be used for lab
143. diately unlocks all the doors  and leaves them open indefinitely      3  To close all doors   click Close All  this immediately locks all the doors  the  System will then revert back to the Door Pattern set for that period      4  To open selected doors only  click on the appropriate Door Icons  to show  an open icon  Click Apply to open or close the doors as indicated by the  icons  or click Cancel to refresh the current door status as given by the  Controller      5  Click OK to close the window     Replacing a Unit    Do not physically remove any Terminal from the bus until it has been  uninstalled in the Software  This is to ensure that the encryption seed  if used   is reset to zero  This will allow future communication with the Terminal if it is  subsequently installed in another System  In addition  the Logical Address of  the Terminal is cleared     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  138  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other System Operations                            xi  Name LA   Fixed Address   Unit Type at  Controller  00  00405220 le 2  TTR Door 08 00000000  TTR  Front Door 07 O04C51ED MR  Design 10 O04C4FAD OL  Lift 04 O04C51E7 MR  North Door 14 000F 4590 MR  TA Point 12 10048086  ra  Admin 05 O04C51E3 HR  PT Door i ce O04C8E1C Pr  Factory 02 004C51E4 KR  Factory 06 O04C51EB MR  PT Door oc 004C7C46 PT  Parking 11 O04C58FF   RE  Despatch o1 O04
144. e   Stops the Relay activation when input has this state   Apply   Accepts the entry    Cancel   Cancels a new entry     NOTE  7o set the relay drive time to an indefinite period  enter 65535 as the  relay duration      1  Click Apply to accept the new Action parameters data into the System  or  Cancel to reject data  This will close the Action dialog box      2  In the Time Triggered Actions Window  click Apply to accept the new  data into the System  or click Cancel to reject new data     NOTE  Failure to click Apply after adding a new Time Triggered Action or  editing an existing one would result in the data being lost     Editing an Existing Time Triggered Action    To Edit a Time Triggered Action  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Action icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu      2  Select the required Time Triggered Action from the list in the top pane    3  Edit the Time and Action fields as required    4  Click Apply to save the edited record     Deleting a Time Triggered Action    To Delete a Time Triggered Action  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Action icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  dropdown menu      2  In the top pane  select the required name to be deleted in the Description  field  and then click Delete     to remove data from System     Next   Event Triggered Actions          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 67  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12    
145. e  85  89  94  114   118  122   tag number  99  106   Tagholder  83  92  93  94  97  99   100  101  102  104  105  106   108  109  110  111  112  117   122  127  128  135   templates  122  145   Terminal  88  91  102  125  136   137  138   Transaction Buffer  135  139   translation  141  142  143  144   145  146   UHF Tag  102   Visitor  91   Web Reports  145  146   Zone  102          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 3  156    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 16   Archive       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 157  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 16   Archive       USER   S NOTES                         k  Custman   XP200   IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 sys swm en 12 Section 3B doc     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 158    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        IXP200 SOFTWARE USER  MANUAL    SECTION 4  System  REPORTS    Section 4   Reports          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 2  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       SECTION 4   REPORTS       CONTENTS  REPORTS  OVERVIEW EE en edatean aa ab nn iii 5  GENERAL  xo ri feed ls st 5  PASSWORD CONTROL OF REPORTS conocccccccccccnononnnnnnononononnonannnnnnnnnnnrnnnanann ann
146. e  and country and translate text      3  If a specific variant of that country is required  enter the variant code along  with the language and country     NOTE   The application must be closed and restarted between steps  1    2        3      It is recommended that the user follows all 3 steps in the correct order  to save  time in the long term because future modifications for any country or variant of  that language would only require slight changes  rather than re entering all the  base language text for every change     Translating    Once the correct locale is chosen  from the File menu  select the Translate  option  A Translation Selection Dialog similar to that shown below will be  displayed     A Translation Selection xi    Select Unit to translate     Main Frame      Panels  Other    MAY Calendar          Translation Selection Dialog    The categories for translation are split up into various components  namely Main  Frame  Panels  Other  and Calendar           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 145  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 14   Translation       Main Frame    This term refers to text that appears in the Main Application Window  including  the Menus     Panels    This option gives access to the panels used by each of the toolbar buttons    1  Click Panels and the icon will appear in the toolbar      2  Close the Translation Selection Dialog and click the Toolbar button
147. e Controller will  automatically exit the menu   Transfer of Changes to the System PC Database    All changes done in the menu are recorded as modification transactions so as to  synchronise with the PC software database if necessary  This synchronisation is  done automatically when the PC software connects to the Controller    Active Keys    The active keys for each level in the menu tree are displayed on the bottom line  of the IXP200 Controller s LCD when that level is accessed  and change  depending where you are in the menu tree structure     The following keys are used for this facility      D O OOOO DO    Menu navigation keys       The following are Menu Navigation keys  They allow you to move within the  menu tree structure            June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 5  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Scroll up  Scroll down  Enter    Escape  Select keys    The following keys are Select keys  They allow you to select characters in the  current menu data field      scroll left  scroll right    See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 6  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities          Controller Keypad Arrangement    See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Editing keys    The    following keys are Editing keys  They all
148. e Supervisor level Tag has been  presented  Tags that have Normal access to the door can be accepted     Tag Level 1    Visitor    The Visitor Tag Level has the following characteristics     a  Expires at midnight    b  Denied in Door Locked  No Entry  Supervisor and Armed mode     Tag Level 2    Normal    The Normal Tag Level has the following characteristics     e Denied in Door Locked  No Entry  Supervisor and Armed mode   Tag Level 3    Supervisor   The Supervisor Tag Level has the following characteristics      a  Can unlock a door in Supervisor mode     b  Can acknowledge  switch off  alarms at Controller     c  Has APB override  if allocated access to the door            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 91  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        d  Can arm and disarm an associated alarm System    e  Allowed in Door Armed mode  if allocated access to the door     f  Denied in Door Locked and No Entry mode     Tag Level 4    Administrator    The Administrator Tag Level has the following characteristics     a  Can unlock a door in Supervisor mode    b  Can acknowledge  switch off  alarms at Controller    c  Has APB override  if allocated access to the door     d  Can arm and disarm an associated alarm System    e  Allowed in Door Armed mode  if allocated access to the door     f  Has access to a door in No Entry mode  if allocated access to the door     g  Denied in 
149. e System can be configured to use up to 4 x 016 Terminals for Lift  elevator   Control     1  O TERMI NAL CONFI GURATI ON   PROCEDURE    Each 116 Terminal monitors up to 16 digital input channels  and each 016  Terminal controls up to 16 relay outputs     To configure the Input Output Terminals  proceed as described below     To access the Input Output Terminals Panel  click on the   Icon     1  If the System has detected any configured Input Output Terminals the first  item that is displayed when entering the menu  is the Terminal Name and  its Logical Address     2  Once the Terminals have been detected and named  each input output line  can then be allocated its own unique name     3  Before the Terminals have been configured  the list of Terminals in the 1 0  Terminal dropdown box is blank           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 57  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals        4  Click Search to create a list of I O Terminals  Referring to the ImproX Unit  Location Chart for that Site  select and name each Terminal in turn         5  IXP200     101    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help    10 Terminals Channel settings                 10 Terminal  Lifts 0101010A    Output       Terminal Setting    Name  Lifts  Usage  ElevatoriLif Control    Duration  10  0 15                             e jo a        Transactions   Alarms    
150. e menu that appears     Controller Options Menu    e  Right clicking on the Controller icon will cause a menu to be displayed  showing the options for that unit     e A typical Options Menu for a Controller is shown in the diagram below           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  130  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics        10 x     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help          FLOOR PLAN 1   Building 1  Ground Floor        Roller door              a     Strongroom E  E       Reception ERE  Aroa   Jet           Details  Reset APB  Open Doors  Close Doors              Transactions   Alarms        sa   Terminal          Controller Options menu    e Clicking on the Details option will display the Unit details dialog shown on  the next page     LI x     Type Jmprox ImproNet Controller   Name     Logical Address pi 010100   Fixed Address foacsag4   Zone J   Location a as                              Controller details dialog    e Clicking on the Reset APB option will cause the System to set all the Anti   Passback Status of all Tagholders to Neutral  This option is for use  for  example  after a building has been evacuated  It allows any Tagholder in or  out of APB zones once only  no matter whether the Tagholder was in or out  when Reset APB was selected           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  131  IX
151. ed  MASTER CSV       MST_SQ   MST_PIN   MST_FIRST_NAME   MST_LAST_NAME   MST_ID   MST  _ADDRESS   MST_COMPANY   MST_EMP   DPT_NO           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility       1 17189  CRAIG   NUGENT  8312175069087  16 Pitlochry Rd   Impro  Technologies   Technician   26    2 56982  PAUL   CHANU   7926857249837   29 Westmead Park   Remez  Security    Consultant   13  3 98357  JOHN   BARRETT    16 Chearsley Rd     oyLand Stones    Driver   13    5 01726  TYRON   HOLMES  8039654006937  32 Musgrave Rd   Edgecombe  Estates      40       AST_PIN MST_FIRST_ MST_LAST_NAME MST_ID MST_ADDRESS MST_COMPANY MST_EMP    17189 CRAIG NUGENT 8 3122E 12 16 Pitlochry Rd Impro Tech Technician   56982 PAUL CHANU 7 9269E 12 29 Westmead Park Remez Security Consultant   98357 JOHN BARRETT 16 Chelmsford Rd Access Install Technician  1726 TYRON HOLMES 8 0397E 12 32 Musgrave Rd TF Promotions    MASTER table   sample  PROGRAM OPERATION     1  Start CSV Importer via IXP200   CSV Importer exe  The usual IXP200  logon sequence is applicable  The Database URL is obtained from  proxette properties  so this must point to the correct file      2  After the logon the CSV Importer screen is displayed  It is very simple   with an Add     and Remove     button to add and remove CSV files and  up and down buttons to order the sequence of the files      3  Click the  Add  b
152. ed using the IXP200 System PC software     This section of the manual describes the configuration of the IXP200 System  Software           SAMPLE DATA    Many of the screens shown in this manual are based on a theoretical IXP200  System  a small System for a fictitious company called Excel Products  A floor  plan for this installation is shown in Figure 1  and a typical block diagram of the  System architecture is shown in Figure 2     The Excel Products installation includes six Doors  four for access within the  main building  one for access to the car park  and a sixth for control of a Lift   elevator   The System also performs Building Management functions   controlling a central air conditioning plant  an emergency generator  oven  heating and a roller door     The last four characters of the ImproX unit Logical Addresses as allocated by  the System are shown next to the units in Figure 1     Four fictitious Tagholders are registered in this simple explanatory System  Their  details are                        Tagholder s Name Tag Number Tag Level  William Newton 208038349100 Administrator  John Walton 208038343237 Normal   Clara Calisto 208038354551 Supervisor  James Nigel Haines 208038347205 Visitor             The System includes six Doors  and two Anti Passback Zones  One ImproX 016  Terminal serves the Lift  elevator   Door 2   and one ImproX 016 Terminal and  one ImproX 116 Terminal provide Building Management services for the air   conditioning plant  roller door  
153. els  a template for label printing must  first be created in Card Designer     To print a Batch of either labels or cards  proceed as follows     1  In the Tagholder Panel  select the required Tagholders from the table  by  either     i  Selecting the Tagholders one by one by holding down the Ctrl key and  clicking the mouse on each Tagholder  or   ii  Selecting a group of Tagholders  for example  Tagholders in a  Department  by clicking on the first Tagholder  then pressing Shift and  clicking the mouse on the last Tagholder in the group    2  Then either     i  When printing to labels  load the label sheets into the printer           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  108  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        ii  When printing a batch of card Tags that have previously been  allocated to Tagholders  load the cards into the card printer in exactly  the same order as the Tagholder selection     iii  When printing a batch of cards that have not been previously  allocated  allocate the Tags according to the printed information                  3  The Batch Print icon is at the bottom of the Tagholder Panel  Clicking on  this icon when Tagholders have been selected will display the Select Tag  Type dialog shown    xi  Select tag type for printing  Slim Tag  5 bytes  M  Select Tag type dialog    4  Select the Tag type for printing from the combo box     5  Click Apply to pri
154. em     To register a new Tag in the   XP200 Database       1  Read the Tag in the normal way at the registration device  or type in the  Tag code if the registration device used cannot read this type of Tag      2  Select the Tag type as ASCII Barcode Magstripe  A dialog will pop up to  allow further conversion of the Tag code      3  Select the appropriate conversion to truncate the Tag code  namely 32 bit   26 bit or 16 bit        ge    C 2  Convert Code to Slim Tag without Customer Code  32 bits   C 3  Convert Code to 26 bit Wiegand without Site Code  24 bits     4  Convert Code to 26 bit Wiegand with Site Code  16 bits     m       Code Truncation selection dialog     4  Click the Apply button to save and close the dialog  Note that the Tag code  value changes in the text box      5  Continue and complete the other required fields and save the Tag by  clicking Apply     NOTE   The same Tag may also be registered as a Slim Tag for the same             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  103  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders             person  The Tag will be read at normal ImproX Readers as a Slim Tag  and at the Impro Wiegand26 Reader as a Wiegand Tag        Tag Registration   Further Steps  For all types of Tags  continue as follows       3  In the Level field  click on the arrow icon  and select one of the four levels  from the dropdown list      4  If the Tagholde
155. ent  The  installation creates the folder database Empty Database which contains three  folders  one for each of the different encodings that are now supported  These are       a  Eastern Europe    b  Western Europe      c  Unicode  This is suitable for the Far East  but can also be used for other  regions  except Eastern Europe   but does use more space on the drive     Each folder contains an empty database suitable for the region concerned  all  empty databases have the name    proxette fdb         NOTE  7hese databases should never be edited directly  but retained as empty  databases to be copied in case of recovery     In case a new empty database is required  select the database for the encoding  required for your locale  and copy it to the  XP200 Database folder before starting  IXP200   all the databases have the same name    proxette fdb     Ensure that the     proxette properties    file has the correct entry for the encoding selected  see  Properties File below      Properties File    A file named    proxette properties     located in the IXP200 folder  is used by the  System to store initialization information  such as the location of the database  the  serial port to be used  as well as Database settings  Serial Port settings and other  settings  A default    properties    file is provided on installation  It should not be  necessary to edit this file as selections made by the user in the Software are  automatically recorded in the file  However  if necessary  th
156. entation triggers the relay for the  full strike duration     Valid Tag presentation triggers the relay until  the door is opened  The relay remains activated  until the door closes  when it is de activated or  the strike duration expires     Valid Tag presentation is denied unless the DOS  contact is in the specified mode     The period of time the relay must be active on  presentation of a valid Tag     The period of time the door is allowed to remain  open before an Event occurs  A non zero value  enables DOS     This box is only enabled for the ImproX MfT  Terminal  When checked  if the comms from the  Controller fails  the MfT will continue to process  Tags that have previously been successfully  presented to that Terminal  giving those  Tagholders access via the door concerned  The  box is greyed out for other Terminals     Terminal where message must be redirected  for  Tag presented at this Terminal  This option is  here to facilitate future System expansion  If this  is a Terminal with an LCD display  select it to  display messages locally     Select the LED and Buzzer Action that must  occur on presentation of a valid Tag  or invalid  Tag      The state of the LED when a Tag is presented   The buzzer volume when a Tag is presented     The period of time the LED and Buzzer Volume  are active during Tag presentation  Enter the          June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice Page 3 38    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3
157. eports       Submit       Submit       Reason Code Configuration reports       Reason Code Configuration reports       Input Trigger Configuration reports    Input Trigger Configuration reports           Door Configuration reports    Door Configuration reports       Configuration Main Page             Configuration Main Page                   Cancel   OK      MMM       Translate Main Configuration Page dialog       This concludes the System Configuration                June 2007 Impro Technologies    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page    3  148    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 15   Database Backup       CHAPTER 15   DATABASE BACKUP AND RESTORE    GENERAL    The IXP200 Software provides the facility to backup and restore the database  files     Two types of backup are possible  namely an automatic scheduled backup or an  immediate manually selected backup     Why Backup     A Backup is a full copy of the database at a point in time  The purpose of the  backup is for recovery if the current database should become corrupt and not  able to be repaired     It is a good practice to keep a set of up to date backups  The best way to do  this is to schedule backups to be executed automatically     File Extensions    NOTE  4  database files from V4 0 onwards have an fdb extension instead of  a gdb extension  The extension js irrelevant for either the InterBase or  the Firebird database management System  The reason for the
158. er Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics             ATEN  gt   File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help    EI  Alt lO     101 x        Ground Floor                FLOOR PLAN 1   Building 1  Ground Floar    Noiler  doar    Laboratory  ZONE 2       ooo    Reception  Area       Transactions   Alarms        seg   Date       o Typical Floor Plan showing unacknowledged Alarm at the  Controller    All alarms are displayed at the bottom of the main screen  as shown in the next  illustration     The software displays unacknowledged alarms at the top of the list  and  acknowledged alarms at the bottom     AY  Transactions Alarms   Door Status l       12 40 14   01  door 1 Anti Tamper  2006 02 21  12 40 09  01  door 1 Anti Tamper   2006 02 21  12 40 17   01  door 1 Anti Tamper SYSDBA                                        Acknowledge All       Alarm display on Main Screen    Graphics Menu Options    The Graphics drop down menu offers the following options            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 127  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics             View  gt  Show Non Readers  Show Inputs  Auto Resize  Icon Text   Tools  gt  Find Tagholder             The View option permits the user to choose whether to show Non Readers  and or Inputs  as well as using Auto Resize to ensure that the Floor Plan is  scaled to fit on the 
159. er to do maintenance  such as a  Sweep if the Database becomes corrupted     Before connecting to a Database on  BConsole  it must be registered  To do this       1  Select Database   Register from the menu to pop up the Register  Database and Connect Dialog  The full path and file name of the Database  file is required      2  Click on the button to the right of the file name to locate and select it  An Alias  name may be supplied      3  The Administrator User Name and Password may now be entered    4  Click on OK to save and exit      5  The Database is now registered and opened  if the User Name and Password  were supplied   indicated by a green tick  check  mark next to the Database  icon      6  To disconnect from the Database  first select the Database icon and then  double click  and then select Disconnect under Action in the right hand pane      7  Click the X in the right hand top corner of the main IBConsole window to Exit  IB_Console     INDEX          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  19  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Administrator  8  18  19   baud rate  13   Configuration  8  10  13   Controller  13   database  7  8  9  10  11  12  13  15   17   Database Management System  10   Database Server  8   Database Settings  10  12   default folder  11   Disk Space  7   Empty Database  10  11   error messages  12   Firebird  8  10  11  12  17  18   IBConsole  17  18  19   initialization information  11   Installation
160. ers      5  To see address information for your network adapter s   select an adapter  from the list in Ethernet Adapter Information     NOTES      1  The IP Configuration utility allows users or administrators to see the current   P address and other useful information about your network configuration     2  You can reset one or more IP addresses  The Release or Renew buttons  respectively release or renew one IP address  If you want to release or  renew all IP addresses click Release All or Renew All     3  When one of these buttons is clicked  a new IP address is obtained from  either the DHCP service or from the computer assigning itself an automatic  private IP address     4  For information about assigning a simple IP address  see Related Topics     Win 2000   Setting up a Loop back Adapter  These pages illustrate the procedures in setting up a loopback adapter in  Windows 2000     The procedure is fairly self explanatory  Where necessary comments are added  to clarify a selection or alternative      1  Select Start and Control Panel           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 6  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information                   ontrol Pane  IOIx     Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a    Beck        7   Search Gyrolders CHristory   US GS X A   Fey ty    Address  fn Control Panel ka                   r   ad Accessibility   Add Remove Administrative Date Time
161. ert   Reader2  Reaser   Readers     Number    ElevatoriLift Door JW   Name  ifts   Reader  focstem Reader3   Reader2   ooacstEamr  Reader4     APB Zone  y Door Entry Code    Day Mode       Transactions   Alarms            Door Tab Panel when configured for Lift  elevator  Control    Door Tab Panel   Middle Pane       Number   The Door number   Lift  elevator    When ticked  checked   defines this Door as a Lift  Door  elevator  Control Point   Name   The name of the Door  selected in the top pane   Reader 1   4   Lift  elevator  Reader Terminal Fixed Address   Select   Displays the Reader Setting Dialog       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 41    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       APB Zone   The APB zone number must be 0   The code required for access by this Reader during  Door Entry Code Door Entry Code Mode   Apply   This button accepts the new entry into the System   Cancel This button refreshes the data with the original  data     Configuring Lift  elevator  Readers   Procedure    To configure a Lift  elevator  Reader  proceed as follows     1  Add the Door allocated for Lift  elevator  Control      2  In the Lift  elevator  Door field  click on the check box  A tick  check  will  appear in the box and the Door Tab s Entry and Exit Tabs will change to  Reader1 to Reader4 Tabs     NOTE   APB Mode is assumed to be Off for a lift  elevator  door  control po
162. esigner Help    lol x        TOO    Controller       Controller Port  ProxPal   Registration Reader Enabled    I Enable Mifare Readers    OM  gt         Yes C No       Mode  Optional     APB Lockout Delay  minutes   Controller Enabled    Apply Daylight Savings    Door Status Polling    E Power Control    C Alarm Arming           Vv  C Yes    No    Set Parameters     Lo 10            Transactions Alarms   Door Status         Time  2004 09 03  16 39 11    Terminal Event     OE  Admin  Terminal Timeout    Operator   SYSDBA       2004 09 03  16 39 03       09  Main Entrance     Terminal Timeout     SYSDBA             2004 09 03      16 39 00 _ 07  Admin     Terminal Timeout     SYSDBA                      Acknowledge All   Acknowledge          Controller Panel    This panel is used to configure the Controller  The    proxette properties    file  stores the settings for the serial port to be used for communication with the  Controller  If the Controller is not detected on that serial port  use this panel to  select an alternative port  Additional Controller functions can be set here as    well as follows            June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 3 25    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       Mode    e Power Control   e Alarm Arming     NOTE  This selection must match the hardwiring of the IXP200 Controller  Relay 2     APB Lockout Delay    This is the delay
163. ettings  gt   To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus    To from other Settings  Menus         Alarm Arm Relay    Latched on    ED Y    Pulsed       Y  Option Selected                Store new data                        Refresh old data       TJ    Arm Alarm menu vsd                      Alarm Arm Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   28  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Peripheral Port Menu    This choice is determined by the type of peripheral device which is connected to  the Peripheral Port of an ImproX DL Terminal  The menu permits the choice of     a  Disabling the Port      b  Communication with an ASCII based device such as a bar code or magnetic  stripe Reader      c  Communication with a Sagem Fingerprint Reader     The peripheral unit should be set to the following communications format      Baudrate   9600 baud  Data bits   8 bits  Parity   None  Stop Bits   1 bit    The Menu flowchart is shown on the next page               lt  Settings  gt     To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus       A i Options    A Port Disabled  ASCIl Bar Magstripe  ES  V X Sagem       y  Option Selected                Store new data                Refresh old data y    Peripheral Port menu vsd                    lt        Peripheral Port Menu  RTE Latch Menu    When the RTE Latch is enabled the latch is not activated  but the Door Open  Timer will be enabled to suppress unw
164. ext illustration      Logon    Server Name  localhost    Database  C AXP200 Database proxette fdh v    Password     User ID        IXP200 Log in screen     2  In the log in screen  enter the actual name of the Server PC  as shown in  Windows  System Properties  gt  Network Identification   for example  this could  be MyServer     3  Enter the local path to the proxette fdb database file  mapped network paths  must not be used  and no browsing is permitted   A typical example of this  path is C  Access Database proxette fdb  This is very important for the correct  functioning of the J aybird driver       4  Enter the Username and Password  and log on           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  14  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12      5  If IXP200 does not run successfully  check all the previous steps  particularly  the local path and the Server name      6  Once the IXP200 software starts correctly  perform an AutolD in the normal  way  There should be no change  as the hardware units are still connected to  the Host PC      7  Check that the software operates correctly  It should still allow deny access at  Doors  read Tags  store transactions  draw up and display Reports  and  perform all of its normal functions     OPERATIONAL DIFFERENCES WHEN USING A HOST AND A SEPARATE  SERVER    When separate Host and Server PCs are used  there are some operational  differences    Backup   The Backup function can still be activated from the
165. faults to the General Tab     2 New Tag Holder    p  General   Details    Tag   Operator    First Name  Jonas    Last Name  Humperdink    PIN used with tag   5 numbers     Company     Note         680           Mio Je      New Tagholder   General Tab       New Tagholder   General Tab       First Name    Tagholder   s first name  Optional     Last Name    Tagholder   s last name    PIN   PIN code number  max 5 digits  Optional    Company    Tagholder   s company name  Optional     Note   Comments about Tagholder  Optional     Box above   Displays a photograph of the Tagholder  Optional       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 94    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       Camera Icon  Camera Icon    Browses folders to locate photographs     Print Card   Print Card     Apply   Save data and exit   Cancel   Exit without saving changes         2  Complete as many of the fields under the General tab as are required  The  minimum information required for the System to accept the data is the Last  Name Field     NOTE    f your company has photographs of its personnel  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Camera icon  A menu will be displayed over the photograph  box      2  Select the Load from File option from this menu      3  A File Open Dialog similar to that shown below is displayed  and then  locate the photograph folder  Select the required photo and click Open   The photo
166. figuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       New Tagholder   Operator Tab    Tagholder is an   Check the box if this Tagholder should be made   Operator an Operator for the System  The Operator User  ID field is now available to enter the UserlD for  this Tagholder  an operator can log on to the  System and allocate low security Tags      Operator User ID   User ID  max 8 characters   Up to 8 characters  can be entered   Delete button   Removes the Tag from the Tagholder     Apply   Save and exit     Cancel   Exit without saving changes   Print Card button   Print Card        Saving the Tagholder Record    If card printing is not required for this Tagholder   click Apply to save all the  data and close the Tagholder Dialog box  Otherwise proceed to    Card  Printing    before saving and and exiting     Card Printing    At this stage  when all required information has been entered for the Tagholder   the Card may be printed     If the Tag has been captured and allocated to the Tagholder  Barcodes may also  be printed for numeric fields such as Tag Number  ID Number or Employee  Number           The following information describes the Impro Card Printing facility  At the end  of this description  the text returns to the Tagholder Information Configuration  procedure        A card may be printed either       a  before being captured  read in  to the System using a new  unused card  Tag  OR    b  after allocation to a Tagholder   a card or label can be printed with the Tag  number on 
167. from the Tags  dropdown menu     2  In the top pane  select the required Access Group from the list under Group  Name  The Access Patterns for the selected Group now appear in the  middle pane     3  Using the mouse double click on required data to be edited  and then follow  the appropriate procedures above     Deleting an Existing Access Pattern    To Delete an Access Pattern  proceed as follows     1  Click on the Access Groups icon on the toolbar or select from the Tags  dropdown menu      2  In the top pane  select the required Access Group from the list under Group  Name  The Access Patterns for the selected Group now appear in the  middle pane           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  89  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups        3  Select the Access Pattern to be deleted and then click Delete below the  Access Pattern panel to remove it from the System     Deleting an Access Group    To Delete an Access Group  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Access Groups icon on the toolbar or select from the Tags  dropdown menu      2  In the top pane  select the required Access Group from the list under  Group Name      3  Click Delete in the top panel to remove it from the System  This may not  be allowed if the group has been allocated to Tags because this would have  the effect of deleting those Tags from the System as well  It is far better to  redefine an Acces
168. g    Next   Moves to the next Tagholder  Previous   Moves to the previous Tagholder    Also  on the Tag Tab  the following additional buttons appear      Next Tag   Moves to the next Tag  Previous Tag   Moves to the previous Tag     See the figure that follows     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 111  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       x  General   Details Tag   Operator    Tag  1 I    Suspend M Reset APB  Number  fee Read Tag  Type   Personal Access Code x  Start Date  Jan 1  2003 y   Level  Mistor y  Start Time   oo foo  Access Group  admin x  Expiry Date  Dec 31  2003  Usage  DOO O Expiry Time  ps a  Message  Po        v  w        Tagholder dialog showing    Next Tag    and    Previous Tag    icons  Deleting an Existing Tag    To Delete a Tag from a Tagholder  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Tagholders icon on the toolbar or select from the Tags    dropdown menu      2  Select the required name to be deleted in the Tagholders Panel  and then    double click on the selected name   displayed     The Tagholder   General Tab is     3  Click on the Tag tab  The Tagholder   Tag Tab is displayed with details    of the Tag that is to be deleted    4  Locate the correct Tag if there is more than one    5  Click Delete to remove the Tag from System      6  Click Apply to confirm deletion of the Tag  or click Cancel to restore the    Tag    7  
169. g when the System  Database Administrator  SYSDBA  user logs ON     The next item to be configured is the Access Group  To gain entry to the  Access Group panel  click on the Pa  Icon           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  83  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups       Access Groups Panel Fields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of all the fields associated with the Access Groups  Panel  the information displayed in the fields and what the buttons    functions  are      Group Name   Lists the existing Access Group names    Add A Allows a new Access Group to be created    Delete   Removes the selected Access Group from the list    Access Group   Name of the currently selected Access Group  max 16  characters     Security Level   Security Level of the currently selected Access Group    Access Patterns l Lists the Access Patterns defined for the currently  selected Access Group  maximum of 8 patterns per  group     ARAN BEE    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help             Supervisor    Access Group   Superviso     Security Level     High C Low  Access Patterns        i Days   Start Time   Duration Doors Floors  Mon  Tue Wed  Thu Fri 00 00  24 00 4 3 2 1 Fir Sec Thi Gro   1 2    Sun Sat Hol 108 00  12  oo  Fir Sec  Thi Gro        ele  ola   _seg   Date   Time Terminal   Event   Name   Tag               O DB COM       Configured
170. ge  An Edit Message Dialog  similar to that shown above is displayed      3  Edit the required fields and then follow the appropriate procedures above     Deleting an Existing Message    To delete a message  proceed as follows      1  Click on Configuration on the toolbar and then select Messages from the  dropdown menu     2  In the Message Text pane  select the required message to be deleted   and then click Delete to remove data from System     NOTE   7o restore the original message click Cancel in the Message Panel  this  only applies if the Apply has not already been clicked on        END OF CHAPTER                   June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 119  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 9   Messages             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 120  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 10   Reason Codes       CHAPTER 10   REASON CODES CONFI GURATI ON    General    This panel allows the user to enter and store up to 99 reason codes  each with a  text description     Reason Codes Panel and Buttons    CL lala    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help    Reason Codes    Reason Code   Reason Text                      Transactions   Alarms    Date          nn AAA    Reason Codes   typical Panel    To Add a Reason Code     1  Select Reaon Codes from the Configuration Menu   
171. gine Workstation  and the second PC  as the Editing Workstation  Typically  the Host PC Engine Workstation might be  in a secure area  while the Editing Workstation could be at a desk where  Tagholder administration  etc  is performed     The Editing Workstation can be used in systems using V6 0  or higher versions   of the System Software  The Editing Workstation will not display live  transactions or alarms  nor door status  and cannot perform any functions that  require active connection to the Controller  Backup cannot be performed from  the Editing Workstation  Tags and Access Groups can be added at the Editing  Workstation  and Reports can be viewed from this PC     e Option 3   Two separate PCs on the same network can be used  one for the IXP200  software  the Host PC   and the second  the Database Server PC  containing the  System Database     e Option 4  Two or three separate PCs can be used to provide a combination of Options 2  and 3     Software    The System Software consists of a single application  IXP200  installed on to a  PC  the Host PC  together with a database  Firebird   Both of these packages  are included on the IXP200 Software CD  The database can be installed on a  separate PC on the same network as the Host PC    The System Hardware is made up of a single IXP200 Controller  and up to 32  ImproX Terminals  and 32 Remote Readers controlling 16 doors  and an  optional ImproX 016 Output Terminal and ImproX 116 Terminal for building  management  Addition
172. he  System database    Cancel   This button rejects this entry     INPUT  OUTPUT TERMI NAL CONFIGURATION    CONFI GURI NG AN OUTPUT TERMI NAL   PROCEDURE  To configure an Output Terminal  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Inputs and Outputs icon on the toolbar or select this from  the Configuration dropdown menu  An 10 Terminal Panel similar to  that shown above is displayed  For a new site all fields are empty      2           Click Search   the System then searches the Terminal Table in the PC for  the Logical Addresses of the Input or Output Terminals  and then displays  the Logical Addresses of the Terminals that were detected in the dropdown  menu of the 1O Terminal field      3         In the 1O Terminal field  click on the arrow button to display the combo   box and select the Terminal to be configured  In this case  an Output   Terminal is being configured     4  In the Terminal Setting window  proceed as follows      a  Click in the Name field and type in an appropriate name for the  Terminal  In this example  the name chosen is Lift  elevator  Control      b  In the Usage field  select the required option from the combo box to  define the function of the Terminal     c  In the Duration field  select the cell and type in the period that the  Tagholder has to make a selection  e g  lift  elevator  buttons are active  for 10 seconds      See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 59  IXP200 Software User Manu
173. he Unit details dialog shown  below     x    Type   mprox ImproNet Controller   Name j   Logical Address br 010100   Fixed Address poscsaag   Zone     Location AAA                        Unit details dialog     2  Clicking on the Open Door option will cause the Open Door dialog  shown below to be displayed     3  Select the time period required from the drop down menu     4  Click Apply to accept this setting or Cancel to ignore the setting     I x   2  Select required action  A      open indefinitely       Open Indefinitely    Open Normal Duration         Open Door drop down menu        Fa  Gi  Door Activated       Door Activated dialog    Clicking on the Monitor Door option causes a dialog Monitoring door entry  dialog such as that shown below to appear    This dialog provides details of Tagholder movements at a door  including a  photo if available   and the Time and Event    Click Stop Monitoring to quit the Monitor Door mode     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  133  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 12   Graphics       Monitoring door entry    xi       No Image    f    Last Name    Kalisto    First Name   lara    Department  dmin   Time   fis  10 31   Event    allowed In                      Stop Monitoring               Monitoring door entry dialog       This concludes the information on Graphics                 June 2007 Impro Technologies    IXP200 Soft
174. he following Terminals   e  ImproX  MfT  Multi function Terminal    ImproX  TRT  Twin Remote Terminal    ImproX  PT  Portal Terminal    ImproX  TA  Time Attendance Terminal        ImproX XFMm Multi mode 13 56 MHz Metal Remote       Multi mode 13 56 MHz Metal Keypad    ImproX XFMmk Remate          ImproX XFMp Multi mode 13 56 MHz Plastic Remote                   O June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 5  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12           Section 1   System Overview          Table 4   Multi mode  Mifare  amp  FeliCa  Remote Readers  Group 1  amp  3    Terminals          ImproX XFMpk          Multi mode 13 56 MHz Plastic Keypad  Remote       125 KHZ TERMI NALS  GROUP 2       Table 5   125 kHz Terminals  Group 2       Group 2 Terminals are    ImproX DBv      ImproX TT and TD  the TD is incorporated into the       ImproX Twin Antenna Terminal  This  can be used with various Antenna  Readers                    ImproX TT   The TT does not support Remotes  designed for use with the ImproX PT  and TA Terminals    ImproX DBv ImproX Vertical Drop Box        125 KHZ ANTENNA READERS FOR GROUP 2 TERMI NALS       Table 6   125 kHz Antenna Readers for Group 2 Terminals       These Antenna Readers can be used with the ImproX TT  MfTor DBv        ImproX CA       Conduit Antenna Reader          ImproX KA          Keypad Antenna Reader              June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change with
175. heading  8  22  23 name  5  7  9  Configuration  5  9  10  12  13  14  parameters  8   15  16  17  19  20  21  22  23 Password  5  6  10  11  databases  9 PC  6 7  global password  5  6 Top Menu  7  hand icon  8 Web Browser  5  7  IXP200 application  7 web pages  5   USER   S NOTES   June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4   44    OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       USER   S NOTES       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 45  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       USER   S NOTES                   k  Custman    XP200           IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 sys swm en 12 Section 4 doc  June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  46    OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        SECTION 5    XP200 Series  System  UTILITIES    Section 5   System Utilities         XP200 SOFTWARE USER MANUAL  SECTION 5   UTILITIES       CONTENTS  INTRODUCTION  ne cree circa ed 3  CHAPTER 1   DATABASE UPGRADING                    et teeta ateeeeeeetenaeaes 3  RUNNING SCRIPTS TO UPDATE AN EXISTING DATABASE                             3  New Installation     3  Existing  installation siii cia ia 3  Automatic Upgrade    a 3  Manual OG rade vacancia 4  CHAPTER 2   FIRMWARE UPGRADE UTILITY    nono nonannnnannnn no 5  A nara ue N aie nia ane nt re attenante 5  TOP MENU OPTIONS oa rer iting ean entend Rise te 5
176. highlighting the date and  pressing the Delete button on the keyboard     Setting the Door Status Polling Parameters     1  Click the Set Parameters button  opposite the Door Status Polling label   to display the Door Status Polling Parameters dialog           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 29  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       A Set Door Status Polling Parameters xi  Polling Frequency  secs  ls    Door Open Time Limit  secs  foo    Door Status Polling Parameters dialog           2  Set the Polling Frequency in seconds  This determines how often the    Controller will be polled and the panel display refreshed      3  Set the Door Open Time Limit in seconds  This determines the period a  door may remain open before the display icon should change to a flashing    icon  This provides a visual alert to the operator     Polling Frequency   5 seconds  Default   Minimum 1 second      Monitored Door Open Time Limit   300 seconds  Default         THIS CONCLUDES THE CONFI GURATI ON OF THE CONTROLLER                 June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 30    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       CHAPTER 3   DOOR CONFI GURATI ON  GENERAL    The configuration of Doors involves the Configuration of     a  Readers     b  Door Mode Patterns     c  Day Modes 
177. his panel     Three buttons are provided         BUTTON FUNCTI ON   Open All   Activates Emergency Mode at all doors  i e  doors are  unlocked    Close All   De activates Emergency Mode at all doors  i e  doors are  locked  unless an Open mode is operating on the door      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 14    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       BUTTON FUNCTION    locked  unless an Open mode is operating on the door  according to the current Door Mode Pattern assigned to it    Refresh   Detects new doors added or deleted and polls and displays  current status     Individual doors can be locked or unlocked by clicking on the appropriate door  icon  A popup menu allows selection of the appropriate action  When an action  is selected  the command is sent to the Controller and it is immediately polled  for its new status  The door icons are refreshed according to the status     The Graphics Panel still provides functions to open close doors as before  The  status of the door will be reflected in the Door Status Panel but may not be  refreshed immediately  It will be refreshed when the Controller is next polled   in accordance with its polling frequency     Door Unlocked   door colour   Yellow iE  Main Entrance  Door Closed   door colour   Blue ici Admin  Door Open   door colour   Green Al South Door    Door Status I cons     See also the information under Setting the
178. hnologies Page 6   22    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Settings Menu    The Settings Menu offers the options shown in the Settings Menu Options  flow chart shown above   Emergency Unlock    The Emerg Unlock menu allows the Administrator to select one of three   options     a  Lock All Doors  This is the default condition  in which doors can be  opened by valid Tags in the normal way depending on Access Group  Door  Mode and Level     b  Open All Doors  This option opens all doors in the system for the time  period allocated to each door     c  Emerg Unlock  This option opens all doors and leaves them unlocked until  Lock All Doors is selected      lt   Settings  gt     To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus             Emerg Unlock Options     Lock All Doors Lock All Doors   Open All Doors  Emerg Unlock       Y X          Y          Option Selected          Store new data                        Refresh old data        Y          Emerg Unlock menu vsd                Emergency Unlock          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   23  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Transactions Menu    This menu enables the Administrator to clear all current transactions from the  Controller memory    lt   Settings  gt            To from Tagholders  Menu    From           To from other Settings  Menus       To from other Settings  Menus          
179. ibes the type of hardware i e  ImproX Micro  Remote    Apply   This button accepts the Terminal selected from  the list    Cancel   This button cancels the selection and closes this  panel      8  In the Exit Terminal field  click Select in the middle pane  A Readers  Setting Dialog similar to that shown above will be displayed  Consult the  Location Chart and then select the required Reader from the list  When  accepted this data is then displayed in the Exit Terminal field     9  In the Reader Setting Dialog  click Apply to accept the Reader  or  Cancel to reject the Reader     10  Enter a zone number only if the door is an APB door  otherwise leave this  setting as zero     11 In the APB Zone field  click in the cell and enter the zone number   between 1 and 16  that the selected door must be in   If doors are  grouped into a Zone  they must have the same Zone number      12 In the Alarm Arm field  select this function  Click Enable to allow this  door to enter the Alarm Arming mode when the System is armed   This  only applies if the Controller Mode is Alarm Arm   Click Disable if arming is  not required           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 34  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration        13 In the APB Mode field  select this mode  If the user selects Relaxed or  Strict and has not entered this door into a zone  when clicking Apply the  user is then prompted 
180. ields and Buttons    Below is a brief description of all the fields associated with the Tagholder Panel   and the information displayed in the fields and what the button   s functions are        Search By   Allows searching by  first or last names  address   company and Tag    Value   The name or address etc  being searched for     Tagholder List    First Name   Tagholder first name is displayed in this field    Last Name    Tagholder last name is displayed in this field    Address   Address of Tagholder    Company   Tagholder   s company name    Department   Tagholder   s department name    Add   Allows creation of a new Tagholder    Delete   Removes a Tagholder from the System  not  recommended     Batch Print   Prints a batch of cards or labels       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  93    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       TAG HOLDER CONFI GURATI ON   PROCEDURE    To configure Tagholder data  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Tagholders icon on the toolbar or select from the Tags  dropdown menu  A Tagholder Panel similar to that shown previously is  displayed  For a new site the list is empty      2  The panel displays data of all the Tagholders entered into the System  database     Adding a Tagholder  To add a new Tagholder  proceed as follows       1  Click Add  The New Tagholder   General Tab panel similar to that shown  below is displayed  This panel de
181. ies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  60  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 4   Input Output Terminals       CONFI GURI NG AN INPUT TERMINAL   PROCEDURE    In the 10 Terminal field  click on the arrow button to display the combo box   and select the Terminal to be configured  In this case  an Input Terminal is  being configured      1  In the Terminal Setting window  proceed as follows       a  Click in the Name field and type in an appropriate name for the  Terminal  In this example  the name chosen is Building Management    NOTE  This field is limited to 16 characters  and the name has therefore been  abbreviated to    Building Manage       b  In the End of Line field  select the required radio button to enable or  disable the Terminal resistor      2  In the Channel Settings window  select a cell and name each Input  channel according to the function for which it has been physically  connected      3  If required  the System will generate an alarm for the input channel  condition  In this case     Door Forced    will generate an Alarm        45 TSP200  10  Xj  File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help       10 Terminals Channel settings     i Input Name Al   Air Conditioning  10 Terminal   Eco Management 01010102    Input y  Search Oven 180  Emerg generator  Door Forced       g  3                   Terminal Setting    Name  IBldg Management             Endof Line       Enable Disable   
182. iew using the combo box   Archives are  named for the date only  with an fdb extension  e g  20030626 fdb       3  Reports will then be processed based on the selected archive database      4  Switch back to the current database when you have finished viewing  reports on the archived database     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 9  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports                      i Explorer  16  x     Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help a    Back    gt      A A  Asearh Favorites GBristory   Eh  GH    Address fel http    localhost webreports servlet net impra ipx2 web webreports  ArchiveSelReport y     Go    Links              Archive Selector    Please select the archive that you want to view        C XP200 datebase proxetie gdb y       Original Database   C IXP200 databaseiproxette gdb  Current Archived Database   C D P200 databaselproxette gdb    Return to the Web Reports Main page    l   a     FE Local intranet       Archive Selector page    Configuration Reports    To access Configuration Reports      1  Click on Configuration Reports     2  The Password Page shown will be displayed    3  Enter the Administrator Password     4  Click on Submit      5  The Configuration Main Page shown will be displayed  This page lists  the various types of Configuration Report available     The Configuration Reports are described in the following paragraphs        June 2007 Impro Technologies Da
183. iguration      Microsoft Internet Explorer   File Edit View Favorites Tools Help   Back    gt      A      Reach Favorites Emedia  4   Eh  G  Address      http jflocalhost webreports servletjnet impro ipx2 web webreports TagHolderConfigReport    Go  Lnk  gt     Tag Holder Configuration                           Export Report  CSV              Return to the Configuration main page    Eee 1332 West Arbuckle  Fairmont  208038350421  2003 06 13  Products    Excel  Products  James Hein  s Acme c o Acme Electrical  Lakeside Drive   Nigel Electrical Cascade   Excel  Products   Excel  Products    Excel 339 Starling Crescent  McGillucuddy  Products Street  Overton       Arturo Fettucini       Clara Calisto 77 Shaw Avenue  Mountain View 208038354551  2001 12 10  2005 12 10       208038343237   Date N A   Date N A       John Walton  Laboratory    13 Fairway  Newport 208038347205  2001 12 10  2005 12 10       Summerfield  Admin 7 Kingsfield  West Fleetwood ARA Date N A   Date N A                               William   Newton Admin 208038349100   2002 05 01   2005 12 31       Return to the Configuration main page          Tagholder Configuration Report    This report lists the Tagholders and the Tag  or Tags  assigned to each of them     Data can be sorted by clicking on the appropriate column heading     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  23    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       TRANSACTION REPOR
184. indow   and then choose the correct serial port     Auto Identification Unit Detection    The purpose of this process is to detect hardware units in the IXP200 System   to identify the type of each unit and to assign a Logical Address to each unit   This information is then stored in the database     NOTE  No configuration of the hardware can be done unless it is physically  connected to the PC via the serial port  Data cannot be entered until  the hardware units have been identified and assigned addresses using  the Auto ID function     Once assigned  the Logical Address is not changed during the next Auto ID but  preserved as recorded in the database  Auto ID may therefore be repeated as  often as required  e g  when a new unit is added to the System  without  corrupting the existing database     Performing Auto I D     1  Select Hardware   Auto ID Units and wait until the cursor returns to a  normal cursor  This may take a considerable time  increasing with the  number of units in the System     2  When the process is complete  a button will appear in the Status Bar  next  to the Status LED indicators  The colour of the icon on the button indicates  the result of the Auto ID   See paragraph Autol D  Database Connection  and Communication Status I cons for details            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 19  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction        3  Click this but
185. indow  as shown     3  Highlight the required Tagholder   s name     4  Click Find the Selected Person to locate the Tagholder  or click Close to  exit the dialog without searching     5  A Last transaction dialog similar to that shown below will be displayed       Last transaction    E x     Clara Calisto          Date foo20ssi 2 S SSS  Time hasz oOo S l  Terminal MainDor SS di  Event  alowedin SS    Last transaction dialog             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 129  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics       Display Change on Alarm Condition    When an alarm condition occurs  e g  if a unit is tampered with   the Graphics  Software will change the display to show the Ground or Floor Plan of the area  where the alarm occurred     NOTE  The display will only be shifted automatically to show an alarm in  another area if the current alarm is acknowledged    Alarm Acknowledgement   An Alarm can be acknowledged on the display by right clicking on the Alarm   icon concerned  and selecting Acknowledge from the menu that appears     Alternatively  highlight the alarm transaction in the alarm panel and click the  Acknowledge button on the panel     To acknowledge all outstanding alarm transactions in the database  click  Acknowledge All   Alarm Details    Details of an Alarm can be obtained by right clicking on the Alarm icon in the  Graphics Panel  and selecting Details from th
186. ins a Glossary of Terms applicable to IXP200 Systems  Items  in bold in the right hand column are listed elsewhere in the left hand column as  entries in this Glossary     TERM EXPLANATION    Access Pattern   A description which defines a particular  time and place where access is to be  allowed  Eight Access Patterns may be  defined for each Access Group     Access Point    see Door     This may be a conventional door with 1 or  2 Readers  or a lift  elevator  control point  with 1 to 4 readers  1 per lift  elevator       Action   An observable   electro mechanical or  recordable system output triggered by an  Event    Antenna Reader   Remote Reader consisting of an enclosed  antenna only    Anti Passback    Anti Passback  APB  is intended to prevent    a Tag holder entering a Zone and  without  physically exiting the Zone  passing the  Tag to a person outside the Zone and thus  allowing that person to gain entry to that  Zone illegally  Three levels of APB are  available   None  Strict and Relaxed     Anti Passback   Override   The presentation of a Supervisor or an  Administrator level Tag overrides any APB  setting    Anti Passback   Relaxed   No double entry allowed but double exit  allowed    Anti Passback   Strict   No double entry or exit allowed    APB    See Anti Passback     APB Lockout Time   This is the period of time for which a valid    Tag holder is not allowed to re enter a  Zone after he she has exited it  This  prevents a Tag holder entering a Zone   then p
187. int   as only one Reader is used per lift  elevator   remember that APB  Mode always requires two Readers at the access point concerned    The APB Zone must therefore also be 0    For each Reader to be configured  proceed as described below  This procedure   is for Readerl  Reader2   4 configuration is similar      1  Click Select  in the middle pane  associated with Readerl  A Reader  Setting Dialog will be displayed as it was for the Door configuration      2  Select the required Reader  as per the Unit Location Chart   located in the  Lift  elevator      See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 42  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       AEN  ioj xi  File Hardware Configuration Tags Reports Help                Door Reader EE  Reader Reader     Output Terminal    z     on Invalid Tag on Valid Tag    LED Action   Flashing Red X Duration  20  0 18  LED Action   Green z  Duration 20  0 15   Buzzer Volume   Loud Aa Duration  20  0 18  Buzzer Volume   Loud z  Duration 120  0 18                          Reader1 Tab Panel     3  Click Ok to accept the Readerl data into the System  or Cancel to reject the  data      4  Click on the Readerl tab  A Reader1 Panel similar to that shown below will  be displayed     Readerl1   4 Tabs       Output Terminal   The Name and Logical Address of the Output  Terminal associated with this Reader  Terminal   ON VALID  INV
188. ion  up to and including the currently released version    t may also be necessary to add the Graphics images     Automatic Upgrade    A utility has now been provided to upgrade the Database automatically  This  utility is called UpgradeDatabase exe and can be found in the install folder          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 3  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 1   Database Upgrade Utility        usually C  IXP200  if a shortcut has not been installed on the Programs  Menu     To upgrade the Database automatically     1  Double click the icon and log on with the password for SYSDBA      2  After running the program  please check the log folder  Two files are  created  Scriptsummary and ScriptUpdater  for the date when executed     3  Read through the ScriptSummary to check that all the script files have run  successfully     4  If not  then check the ScriptUpdater file  This file could assist your dealer  in sorting out any errors reported     The screen shown below is a typical Database updater dialog after updating the  Database from V1 2 to V3 2        A Datat    oj x    File Help  Main Card Graphics  Database version 0 03 1 06 1 04  Script version 3 6 1 06 1 04                File progress  Total progress o                         Database Updater dialog  Manual Upgrade    Please refer to RunningAScript rtf  Section 2 of this manual  for instructions  on how to run a script file manually   
189. ion 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       The Edit dialog sub menu bar options enable you to Crop the photo  and to  Undo changes     Tagholder Details    Click on the Details tab  A New Tagholder   Details Tab similar to that  shown below is displayed     A New Tag Holder x     5   Tag   Operator         General De    ID No   Po   Department   RS   Department  Employee No    fT   Tel     Date of Birth   y     Address         New Tagholder   Details Tab    New Tagholder   Details Tab       Id No    Tagholder s personal Identity Number   Optional     Department   Department selected for the Tagholder   Optional     Department button A Allows selection of a department  Depart   ment Dialog     Employee Number Employee Number  Optional     Tel   Tagholder s telephone number  Optional     Date of Birth    Tagholder s birth date  Optional    Address   Tagholder   s home address  Optional     Apply   Save and exit    Cancel   Exit without saving changes       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 97    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders      Print Card button   Print Card       Complete as many of the fields under the Details tab as are required   Department List       The Department field is optional and can be left blank  If a department is  required  click the Department button to display the Edit Department List  dialog shown below     Adding a New Department     1
190. is file can be edited   using a program such as WordPad or Notepad  Comment lines are preceded by a          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  11  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12           character   The    graphics properties    file also stores configuration information for the graphics  module     Database Settings    The database should have the setting  Forced Writes    true in Database properties   It is not necessary to change the URL in the    properties    file to specify where     proxette fdb    is located  When logging on to IXP200  the user can browse to locate  the database  The database must be located on the same PC as the IXP200  Software  This location will then be stored in the    properties    file under the key  Proxette  database   nterbase  URL O C    I XP200  database   proxette fdb  The database encoding property also appears in the  proxette properties    file  It is  important to ensure that the encoding property matches the database selected   This is essential to ensure that the data in the database is interpreted correctly   This is done automatically for a new installation  An existing database is never  overwritten  but the    properties    file is overwritten in V5 0 only of IXP200 to correct  the driver settings   e g  Proxette database   nterbase encoding ISO 8859_1  Use     ISO 8859 1 for Western Europe  Latin 1     WIN1250 for Eastern Europe  Latin 2     UNICODE_FSS for the Far East  Unicode 
191. it   In this case it must be loaded as the first card in the printer  to ensure that the Tagholder s details are printed onto the card just  allocated to him her     Card Printing Procedure   Single Cards    To print cards  follow this procedure            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  106  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        1  Place one or more new cards in the printer as required  only if the Tag  code has not been read in yet       2  Print each card by clicking Print Card at the bottom of the Tagholder  dialog      3  The Select Template dialog shown below will be displayed  unless a default  template has been set from the Card Designer  Set Default Template  menu     FA Select template    xj      Admin and Lab Card  Factory Card                Select Template dialog     4  In the Select template dialog  highlight the required template  and click  OK      5  Once the desired template has been selected  select the required printer  a  dialog similar to the one below will be displayed once the template is  accepted      Print la    m Printer    Name    WISERYS Gestetner Upstairs z   Properties         Status  Ready  Type  NRG D425 2825 3225  Where  192 1 3 18 PASSTHRU             Comment  J Print to file  m Print range Copies    All Number of copies  1      C Pages from  1 to   9999    j Collate     Selection pel pl F  cen                     Select printer 
192. key     6  In the PC Comms menu  use the Scroll left and Scroll right keys to  select the required option     7  Use the OK key to accept the new option  or the Cancel key to reject it  and to retain the original option     8  This will return the system to the PC Comms menu     9  From this point any other Settings sub menus can be selected using the  Scroll up and Scroll down keys  or you can return to the Settings menu  by pressing F5           June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Y    m System Off line a            Present  Administrator s Tag to  Controller                                        lt  Settings  gt   Checked OK JH 01 12       LTF d Tle d     lt   Tagholders  gt     To from other Settings  Menus    To from other Settings  Menus       Options    RS485  RS232             Option Selected          Store new data                        Refresh old data y    Demo Settings menu vsd                      Entering and modifying the PC Comms Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies    Page 6 11  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       TAGHOLDERS    MENUS    There are several menus available for changing data relating to Tagholders     Tagholders Menu    The Tagholders menu offers the functions shown in the diagram Tagholders  Menu Options  The link to the Settings Menu is also shown                            
193. ks which may be  carried out occasionally  for example when upgrading from one software version  to another     These are described in this section     CHAPTER 1   DATABASE UPGRADING  RUNNING SCRI PTS TO UPDATE AN EXI STING DATABASE    New Installation    With each new release of IXP200  a set of empty Databases is included which is  compatible with the new release  There is one Database per locale  These  should be used for a new installation  No scripts are required to be run for a  new installation  If there is no Database in the main Database folder after  installation  it must be copied there from the chosen locale folder  Generally   from V3 4 2  the correct Database is automatically installed to match the locale  chosen during installation     Thus  for new site installations  where a NEW DATABASE IS USED  THERE IS  NO NEED TO RUN ANY UPDATE SCRIPTS     Existing I nstallation    However for customers with an existing Database containing user data that  must be preserved  it may be necessary to run scripts on the Database to  upgrade it to the new version  Upgrade scripts are included  as necessary  with  each release of IXP200  The Scripts folder contains separate folders for each  version  which contain the actual script files    sql   Thus  when upgrading  IXP200  one will have to upgrade an existing Database by executing the scripts  that are new for that release     NOTE    t will be necessary to run the scripts for each version of software after  the existing vers
194. l Port     a    b      c     Connect the RS232 Serial Port on the Host PC directly to the Controller s RS232  Port  Default option      The distance between the Host PC and the Controller may not exceed 25 m   27 34 yd      Tags are registered by reading at the Controller     Option 2   Serial Port to ProxPal to Controller          a   b         Connect the ProxPal to an RS232 Serial Port on the Host PC   Connect the ProxPal to the Controller by RS485     The Controller configuration must be manually changed to operate in RS485  mode   see Section 6 of this manual     The distance between the Host PC and the Controller may exceed 25 m  27 34  yd    Tags are registered at the ProxPal on the desktop     Option 3   USB Port to USB Registration Reader to Controller    Connect the ImproX RS USB Registration Interface  with its associated Reader   to a USB Port on the Host PC     Connect the USB Registration Interface to the Controller by RS485     A USB driver must be installed on the PC to redirect the USB Port to a COM  Port   see NOTE below     The Controller configuration must be manually changed to operate in RS485  mode   see Section 6 of this manual     Tags are registered at the Registration Reader on the desktop     NOTE  When using the ImproX RS Registration Interface  a definite procedure    must be followed to install the USB drivers  This procedure is described in  the 1XP200    readme rtf    file under the heading INSTALLI NG THE USB  DRIVER TO SUPPORT THE REGISTRATI
195. l also be triggered     Open Mode   The door remains unlocked until the start of the next Door Time Slot  This  Mode is triggered by the first valid Tag presented to the Reader  All Terminals  in the same Zone as this Reader which are in Open Mode will also be  triggered     Door Entry Code Mode  e This mode requires a keypad Reader at the door     e When the door is in this Mode  the Door Entry Code for the door can be  used for access     e The Door Entry Code must be followed by the   key  Door Entry Codes  can be 1 to 5 digits      e No Tag is required  although a Tag can be used instead of the Door Entry  Code as described in the Tag Mode paragraph     NOTE  7ag PIN  Dual Tag  Record and Denied Alarm settings are ignored for  the Open  Open Now and Door Entry Code Modes     Personal Access Code Mode   e This mode requires a keypad Reader at the door    e The Personal Access Code is effectively a type of Tag  and once entered   followed by a    at the Reader  it is validated by the System as a Tag    e Normal Tags are also valid during this mode    e Neither Tag   PIN nor Tag   Reason apply during this mode    e Dual Tag can be applied to this mode  the two Tags can either be two  normal Tags  two PAC   s or a normal Tag and a PAC     Tag Mode  In this mode  all Tagholders with valid access are allowed when presenting a  valid Tag              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 49  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section
196. lder Panel Fields and Buttons                                                 93  TAG HOLDER CONFIGURATION   PROCEDURE c coccccccccccncoconnncnnnonononnannnnnnos 94  Adding a Tagholder                                                         aai aani iai 94  New Tagholder   General Tab    94  In the menu that appears in the photograph box  select Edit                 96  Tagholder Details    rte nine nt Mt nil tint 97  New Tagholder   Details Tab    97  NT 98  Adding a New Department    98  Editing a Department Name   ocoocccoccccccoononnnnnnnonanon nana nn nn nn nnn nn nanan narran 98  Adding a Tagholder  Continuation    Tag Data    99  New Tagholder  Tag  Taba 100  Register the Tag ccoo aca ii data pci 101  Registering UHF Tag    ccoccocococonononononinonannnnnnnnnnnnn nana n nn nnrnrr nr narran 102  Registering Fingerprints as Tags    102      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 79    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration          Registering Personal Access Codes  PACS  as Tags    102  Using Personal Access Codes with APB                                      103  Support for Devices using Wiegand Tag Codes    103  Tag Registration   Further Steps                                                         104  New Tagholder   Operator Tab    106  Saving the Tagholder Record    106  Card Printing aniraa boa cc na e tendon ai agree 106  Card Printing Procedure   Single Cards    106  Printing Directly onto
197. lities    Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility             USER   S NOTES  k  Custman   XP200   IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 sys swm en 12 Section 5 doc                      June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice Page    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     5  16       I XP 200  Software User Manual    SECTION 6  MANUAL EDI TING  FACILITY    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       IXP200 Software User Manual  SECTION 6   CONTROLLER MANUAL EDITING FACILITY       CONTENTS   INTRODUCTION innnan di ed a de 5  Entering the Mela 5  Transfer of Changes to the System PC Database    5  ACLIVE KOYS iii dir 5  Menu navigation Kio 5  Select ata SRE Perte ES mas AAIE Tea rA ie gaa dard SES EE 0 6  Editing KEYS O arene ed nt ee 8  Alphanumeric  Entry  a 8  MENUS EE EE an ra ide En dea 8  A n Eaa ae OE AE rame d in tant nana ire 8  First Level MenUS serieuse ice 9  EXAMPLE OF THE USE OF THE MANUAL EDITING FACILITY ccc 10  Settings Me  u Example tn rar 10  TAGHOLDERS MENUS issii tee nt dd 12  Tagholders Mena rai 12  Delete Menor ti in 13  Add Edit FUNCtON aria 13  Add Edit Menuisier tente ina 14  Suspend  Mendes a terne tr tn sige tree st An 16  Name Menthe ee ad coat vite nee a terme etat tete ci 17  O sadtesabiia saacerens tev A a ea E ates 18  Access Group Menu 2    ecceeccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeseenteeeesenseeetaeeas 19  PUN M  secs ico ia 20  Door Entry    Code  Menus  coca ira 21  SYST
198. llations      7  Any existing    proxette properties    file is overwritten for V5 0 onwards to ensure  that the correct driver settings are present  If the default settings had been  changed in the existing installation  it may be necessary to browse to locate  the existing database at logon and check the serial port and ProxPal Tag  Reader Registration Reader setting when starting IXP200      8  For a new installation where no prior database exists  file    proxette fdb      you  will have been prompted during the installation for your locale  region   The  correct database file type for that locale will then be automatically copied from  the Empty Database folder to the Database folder  The encoding property in  the  proxette properties    file is automatically set to match the locale chosen   The    graphics properties    file will have its settings synchronised with     proxette  properties    when logging on to IXP200   See Database Settings      9  If a database already exists from a previous installation  refer to the  UpdateReadme file for update instructions     Java Runtime Environment Installation    The IXP200 Software Installation Wizard will automatically install the Java Runtime  Environment  J RE  with comms extensions     Installation of Firebird    This is triggered automatically during  XP200 installation  but can also be started  manually if required     Firebird  V1 5 2  is the version currently used  There is no need to reinstall the  current version if
199. llowed  Each  Tagholder Access Group can have up to eight Access Patterns  Each Tag must  be allocated an Access Group    Addressing Scheme   Each ImproX Terminal is factory programmed with a 4 byte unique address   called a Fixed Address   At the initial System start up  the IXP200 Controller  polls for these unique addresses and the IXP200 Software assigns a 2 byte  Logical Address to each unit detected  this process is called    Auto ID         The Logical Addressing as supported in the communications protocol is used to  address all units  The Logical Addresses are stored in the individual units    non   volatile memory  so that the process of assigning Logical Addresses is only  required on the initial System start up           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 17  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       Architecture   System PCs    In an IXP200 System  the following PC configuration options can be used     e Option 1  a single PC  called the Host  can be used for all control and storage functions   In this case  all system and database control are vested in this PC     e Option 2   Two PCs  on the same network  can be used  The first  known as the Engine  Workstation  a Host PC   would communicate with the system Controller  and  would be used to monitor and control the  XP200 system  The second PC would  be used for offline editing of the Database     In this case the Host PC is known as the En
200. logies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  32  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Person Access Pattern Report           Person Access Pattern Report      Microsoft Internet Explorer       File Edit view Favorites Tools Help     Back    gt      a   search CFavortes media  4   ayo   Address  E  http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports PersonAPReport hd  Go   Links zj  2    Person Access Pattern Report                              Submit Export Report  CSV                   Return to the Web Reports Main page      f    Select Person    William Newton     Date from 2003 06 01 7  to  2003 06 30     i    Summary Only    7 A    Date Filter   2003 06 01 to 2003 06 30   Date Timeln   Time Out Hours Errors  2003 06 11 14 42 48   16 12 26 01 29 38  1 49     2003 06 12 16 08 21   16 09 00 00 00 39  0 01     2003 06 13 09 16 09   09 16 09 00 00 00  0 0     1 O                            Average Time In  15 25 34  2 Records     Average Time Out  16 10 43  2 Records  ES  Average Hours at Work   00 30 05  3 Records  N  Total Hours at Work   01 30 17  1 50 Hours  ye E       Person Access Pattern Report    This report details the Access Pattern of a specified Person for a specified  period     The required person must be selected from the Person combo box     Selecting the Date from or Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be  displayed  as described previously under Access Reports      See next page       June 2007 
201. media    a  amp     System Users and VirusScan  Passwords        Connects to other computers  networks  and the Internet My Computer       Control Panel Screen          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Select Network and Dial up Connections     fg Network and Dial up Connections    01 x       Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help EI       Back              Search Folders CBristory   US GE X wa   Eee    A                    Address Network and Dial up Connections bd       mul  Ha  E  make New Connection    IMPRO LAN  Network and Dial up    Enabled  Local Area Connection    Enabled  Connections       Local Area Connection  Type  LAN Connection  Status  Enabled    Microsoft Loopback Adapter        Microsoft Loopback Adapter       Network and Dial up Connections Screen   20  Select Local Area Connection      21 The next task is to choose the connection properties  protocols and  addresses     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 8 14    Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Local Area Connection Properties Ax    General   Sharing      Connect using       BH Microsoft Loopback Adapter    Components checked are used by this connection            a Client for Microsoft Networks  a File and Pri
202. mpro Technologies design and manufacture a wide range of technically  advanced  high quality  reliable Access Control and Asset Identification and  Management Systems  Please contact your distributor to find out more about  our products  or advise us of your needs for specialized products not yet in our  extensive and continually expanding range        Patents and registrations for ImproX designs are pending  world wide    Registration of the trademarks    IXP200         ImproX  is pending  world wide               k  Custman  IXP2001  IXP308 0 0 GB 11 Issue 12 June 2007 English Manuals   IXP200 sys swm en 12 Section 8 doc                      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 20  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        
203. n  Screen to install the driver programs      17  Click Next           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 12  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Completing the Add Remove  Hardware Wizard                The following hardware was installed   Microsoft Loopback Adapter       Windows has finished installing the software for this device     To close this wizard  click Finish           Cancel       lt  Back    Completing the Add  Remove Hardware Wizard Screen     18 The Drivers are loaded and the system displays the Completing the  Add  Remove Hardware Wizard Screen      19  Click Finish to display the Control Panel Screen                          ontrol Pane 3  10  x     File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea    Bak      gt      Qsearch Curoders Pristory   AS OF X A   Eee      adess En contra Panel nl    Gi  dl S amp S Em E    Accessibility Add Remove Add Remove Administrative Date Time  Control Panel Options Hardware Programs    Network and Dial up Connections ES GT A  E     Connects to other computers   networks  and the Internet Fax Folder Optioms Fonts Gaming InterBase Internet  Options Manager Options       Windows Update E  Windows 2000 Support a i    3  zy   4       Java Plug in Keyboard Mail N C Phone and  1 3 1 Modem        Y    a de    Power Options Printers Regional Scannersand Scheduled Sounds and  Options Cameras Tasks Multi
204. n 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       RIM lax    File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help          Rear Door          Laboratory  Door   Entry   Exit    Number  a Elevator Lift Door P    Name  Main Door       Entry Terminal   ooacst ECHR  Select   Alarm Arm     Disable    Enable  Exit Terminal   ooacsae5quR  Select APB Mode    C off    Relax    Strict  APB Zone  Door Entry Code 456             Transactions   Alarms       sea   nie   time   Terminal   Een Nene   ty          Sa       Door Tab Panels    See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 36  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration        iix    Fie Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help       Door Entry   Ex         ron Invalid Tag    LED Action  Flashing Red   Duration   20  01s       Buzzer Volume   Loud     Duration   20  0 18   RTE Mode     Normally Open C Normally Closed    DOS Usage   Normal Y Strike Duration  0 1s   so pon Valid Tag     T Enable Offline Validation Open Duration  s  LED Action  Green 7  Duration  Po  15     Message Display Terminal  Buzzer Volume   Loud y  Duration   20  015     Reader Function      Access Control    Time  amp  Attendance       DOS Mode    C Normally Open    Normally Closed                               Transactions   Alarms    Door Status      2006 07 04 12 57 06   00  Power Up  2006 0
205. n IXP200 System  The I XP200  System Software supports both 125 kHz and Mifare  13 56 MHz  Tags  Interface  units support some types of third party Biometric Readers  refer to Table 9   as  well as Wiegand  Barcode  RF and IR devices     CONTROL AND I NPUT  OUTPUT UNITS       Table 1   Control and I nput  Output Units       IXP200 IXP200 LCD Keypad Controller  Controller  IXP920 1 0 GB xx  and the   plus CDROM    associated Software                             ImproX 116 ImproX 16 Channel Input Terminal   ImproX 016 ImproX 16 Channel Output Terminal      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 2    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 1   System Overview       125 KHZ TERMINALS  GROUP 1       Table 2    125 kHz  Terminals  Group 1       Group 1 Terminals are    DT  ER  PT  TA and iTA                             ImproX Portal Terminal  Can be used  0 with any one of the Remote Readers  AROS listed in Table 3   ImproX Time and Attendance  Terminal   ImproX TA  Can be used with any one of the  Remote Readers listed in Table 3   ImproX Extended Range Terminal   ImproX ER Has its own dedicated antenna   not  for use with Remote Readers or  Antenna Readers   2 Industrialised version of ImproX TA      ImproX iTA  uy   te    K E Industrial Time   Can be used with any one of the  PB  amp  Attendance Remote Readers listed in Table 3     Terminal  See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12 
206. nd machine   An Editing Workstation   this PC can be used to edit the System offline     NOTE  When an Editing Workstation is included  the Host PC is known as the  Engine PC     The minimum requirements for any PC and peripheral devices used with the  Software are as follows     CPU   Pentium II 300 or faster processor    Memory   Minimum 128 MB RAM  256 MB for Windows NT    Peripherals   CDROM drive  or access to a network CDROM drive   Communications  RS232 port    Hard Drive E Minimum 200 MB of unused space    Floppy Drive   3 5    high density stiffy drive    Pointing Device  Mouse or equivalent    Printer 3 Laser or Inkjet printer    Display   Super VGA with a minimum resolution of 800 x 600     Disk Space Requirement per PC    200 MB of free disk space on the local drive is required to install the IXP200 System  Software and the database     Operating System    The IXP200 System Software requires one of the following operating Systems to be  installed on each of the PCs involved     Windows 98     2000 Professional  NT or XP Professional            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  7  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     NOTE       Windows 98 cannot be used in Systems using the USB Registration  Reader     Software Location    The Software may be installed to a folder    IXP200    on any hard drive in the Local  Host PC and the Editing Workstation  if used   The information in this section  assumes that the Software is inst
207. nd or Exit Reader    Two Readers are required to make a door function in Anti Passback Mode    Doors may also be grouped together into one or more APB Zones  during   System configuration     Door Mode Patterns   A pattern consists of sequential time intervals or slots  covering a 24 hour   period  There can be up to 8 Time Slots for each Pattern  each with a different   Mode    Lift  elevator  Control   The System can be used to control access to floors in a building via Lifts    elevators   When selecting the Lift option  a    door    represents a group of Lifts    elevators   A maximum of 4 Lifts  elevators   Digital Output Terminals  and 16   Floors can be accommodated  Each Lift  elevator  must be provided with a   Reader Terminal and associated Output Terminal  refer to the IXP200   Installation Manual for details      For Lift  elevator  control  a Reader is installed inside a Lift  elevator  and is  linked to a specific 016 Output Terminal that functions as a Lift  elevator   Control Unit  This means that access to specific floors can be assigned to the  Tag  When the Tag is presented at the Lift  elevator  Readers only the buttons  corresponding to those floors are enabled for selection  The duration of the  enabled period can be set in the Configuration Software for the Lift  elevator   Control 016 Terminal    Access Groups   Access to certain areas is given to Tags by means of Access Groups that define  when access is allowed and the doors through which access is a
208. ndows 98 Second Edition  Microsoft TCP IP provides a new mechanism  for IP addressing  called automatic private IP addressing  If you have a small  network  without a server  you can assign a unique IP address to your network  adapter using the  LINKLOCAL network  IP address space  LINKLOCAL network  addresses always begin with 169 254 and have the following format     169 254 X X    LINKLOCAL network addresses are used only for private  internal address and  are not valid for host computers that are visible on the Internet     After the network adapter is assigned a LINKLOCAL network IP address   computers can communicate  using the TCP IP protocol  with any other  computer on the network that uses the same addressing     For computers which have no network card installed    The procedure is similar to the previous example     A Windows 98 Second Edition computer that is configured for automatic private  IP addressing can assign itself a private IP address if either of the following  applies      a  If the computer is not configured as a laptop  it can assign itself an  automatic IP address at startup if the computer does not have a valid DHCP  lease and no DHCP server is found on the network  DHCP refers to a PC  that functions as the server for a network      b  If the computer is configured as a laptop  it can assign itself an automatic  IP address if no DHCP server is found on the network  regardless of  whether it has a DHCP lease or not     NOTES      1  Automatic IP a
209. ne by     1  Presenting a valid Administrator Supervisor Tag at the Reader      2  Pressing the   key  the Tagholder has 10 seconds to press the   key to  arm the Alarm System     NOTE   t js not necessary to press this key to disarm the System    Once the   key has been pressed to Arm the System  the IXP200 Readers will  beep every second for 30 seconds before arming to allow users to exit the  building    When the System is Armed the door Reader   s Status LED blinks Red    Only valid Administrator Supervisor Tags can disarm the System when entering    the building  This is done automatically when the Tag is presented at a Reader  on entering     Digital   nputs      Input 1 This input indicates on the Controller LCD that the Alarm  Panel is Ready     Input 2 This input indicates on the Controller LCD that the Alarm    Panel is Armed           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 24  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 2   Controller Configuration         Input 3    Input 4    This input can be used as a General Alarm   This input indicates on the Controller LCD that the    System is in the Emergency Unlock Mode     NOTE  7he Controller is not approved for use as a burglar alarm     Controller Configuration    The first item to be configured is the Controller  To access the Controller Panel     click on the     1XP200    H  Icon     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card D
210. nistrator password and may be changed at a  later stage after Configuration is complete     The ID field in the Log on dialog is for use by designated Operators  see  Adding Another User in the Software Installation section  Section 2  of this  manual   This field allows an Operator access to the database for Operator   designated functions     Once the Administrator has logged on to the database  the System will attempt  to open the serial port for communication with the ImproX IXP200 Controller   The first time that an attempt is made to log on to the System  the Controller  1 D  will not yet be stored in the database  The user will therefore be asked if  Auto  dentification  Auto ID  is required     New System   Logging on for the First Time    After logging on to a System for the first time  the dialog shown below will be  displayed           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 18  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction    FA Database Hardware Check   X          No controller in database  Execute Auto ID    ne               Auto I D Request Dialog     1  Click on Yes to execute the Auto ID      2  Answer Yes to proceed immediately or No to display the Main Application  Window      3  Auto ID can then be selected from the Hardware Menu      4  If the serial port fails to open when the Main Application Window is  displayed  select Configuration   System from the menu in that w
211. nits are dedicated to Tag  registration      4  Enable or Disable Mifare Readers as required      5  In the Mode field  select the Power Control or Alarm Arming Mode in  accordance with the Controller wiring for your System     NOTE  Before selecting one of the radio buttons  the required option must be  hard wired  to Relay 2  before this function can be enabled  Details of  this wiring are included in the IXP200 System Installation Manual      6  In the APB Lockout Delay field  select the cell and type in the amount of  delay time required  This function prevents the same Tag from gaining  access more than once at the same point of entry for that set period of  time  e g  30 minutes   If no Lockout Delay is required  enter a zero  0      7  The Site Communication Seed field is not available in this software  version  but will be implemented at a later stage  At present a zero  0   must be entered in this field           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 27  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration        8  In the Controller Enabled field  the tick in this check box just verifies that  the Auto ID has detected the Controller  An unchecked box indicates that  the Controller is not functioning correctly      9  Click Yes or No for Daylight Saving      10  Clicking Yes  enables the Daylight Saving button  click this and set the  Time Offset  Start Date and Time and En
212. nnn cnn ncnan 122  CHAPTER 11   CARD DESIGN    123  INTRODUCTION tcscsiectiiechs Monet drames iia dinar pe nt ain 123  CARD DESIGNER    252 2 sone te ia 123  CHAPTER 12  GRAP Occ Man nt nr ten net den 125  GRAPHICS  SOFTWARE sins odiada aid ct 125  Feat  r ES men Reda e aa arsed baled E EA A A Ea Gai 125  Using the Graphics Runtime Module    125  Selecting a Floor Plans stimulants 125  O 126  Graphics Menu Options    127  Locate Tagholder Option    129  Display Change on Alarm Condition          c cece eeeeeeeeeeeteeteenaeees 130  Alarm Acknowledgementwiscunchied sis nd tan 130      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  80    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration          Alarm Details airoso acacia laicas da edi id 130  Controller Options Menu   ooociconoccnncniconnnnan nono nnnnnnnnnan cnn nn nnrarnc nan nnnnnr 130  Remote Reader Options Menu    132  CHAPTER 13   OTHER SYSTEM OPERATIONS    137  Generali Aia 137  Full Data Upload iii eas einai eesti cl 137  Reset Anti Passback  APB          cccccccccsecceseecesseeesesseueseueuuueeeaueueseannsss 137  Emergency Open Doors  ste nine ces 137  Emergency Open Close Doors   Procedure    138  Replacing a Unit cocino cinco entr e a de 138  Removing or Replacing a Terminal    139  Replacing a Controller    140  Clear Transaction Buffer                                                     141  CHAPTER 14  TRANSLATION tenta dad 143  A A AA 143  Translation   Locali
213. nnnn oran nn rr rnrnrn anna rr 24  Digital  INPUTS srin napina dante dicte 24  Controller Configuration paa os 25  APB  Lockout DAY te salt A aa EAAS 26  Mifare Reader cuicos ota 26  Controller Fields and Buttons                                                           26  Configuring the Controller   Procedure    27  Daylight  Saving siii orina 28  CHAPTER 3   DOOR CONFIGURATION          cc cece cette eee e ete eenttaeeeeeeeeeetee 31      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 1    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration          GENERAL comicas cad 31  DOORS  READERS AND DOOR MODE PATTERNS CONFIGURATION              31  Doors and Readers Panel Fields and Buttons     ooonnonocccnnnnnnnicccccccncnanon 32  Door Tab Panel   Top Pane                                                  nnna 32  Door Tab Panel   Middle Pane                                                              32  Configuring Doors and Readers Procedures                                     33  Reader Setting Dialog             cece eee cette teeter teen cn nn ease nr narran 34  Entry and Exit Tabs eee Mes te te ne A Abts 35  Entry and Exit Tabs   Middle Panel    37  DELETING AN EXISTING DOOR c0ococcccccconoconncnnncnnnonnnnano nono nnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnna 39  LIFT  ELEVATOR  CONTROL  cine olen meta ne ater thas 41  Door Tab Panel   Middle Pane                                                         41  Configuring Lift  elevator  Readers   Pr
214. nt  or Cancel to abort     6  If Apply is selected  the Select Template dialog shown previously under  Card Printing Procedure   Single Cards will be displayed     7  Proceed as per the instructions  4  and  5  that follow the Select  Template dialog illustration    See next page     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  109    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders                                           Aba MEE   Fil File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help   Tag Holder   Search By    Value   T FirstName   Last Name Address   Company Department    fonn  Walton 13 Fairway  Newport Excel Products Laboratory   2  James Nigel Haines cio Acme Electrical  Lakeside Drive  Cascade Acme Electrical   3 Clara  Calisto 77 Shaw Avenue  Mountain View Excel Products Admin   4  William Newton 339 Starling Crescent  McGillucuddy Street  Overton      Excel Products Admin                          seg   Date Time Terminal   Event Name   Tag      Joos jo com  Typical Tagholders Panel          Editing an Existing Tagholder    To Edit a Tagholder  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Tagholders icon on the toolbar or select from the Tags  dropdown menu      2  Using the mouse double click on the required name to be edited and then  select the appropriate procedures as described in    Adding a Tagholder     to complete the editing      3  Search for the Tagholder Tag re
215. nted  reasonable attorney fees and expenses     10  SEVERABILITY  Should any item of the License Agreement be declared  void or unenforceable to any court of competent  jurisdiction  such declaration shall have no effect on the  remaining terms hereof     11  NO WAIVER  The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted  hereunder or to take action against the other party in  the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed  a waiver by that party as to subsequent enforcement of  rights or subsequent actions in the event of future  breaches                       12  USE WITH 3   PARTY EQUIPMENT   The use of this Software with a card printer  or any  other 3rd party equipment  is undertaken at the client s  own risk  Impro will not accept liability for any damage  to such equipment caused by incompatibilities between  Impro Technologies    Software and the said equipment           READ THI S BEFORE OPENI NG THE ENVELOPE CONTAI NI NG THE SOFTWARE       xiii       Section 1   System Overview       SECTION 1   CONTENTS       GENERA Lis sisi as cidade mater dead given dads chs A a daa 2  IMproX Terminal Sxiss a a a 2  Types OF UNIS ceci tii arth aes 2  CONTROL AND INPUT OUTPUT UNITS   2  125  KHZ FERMINALS   GROUP suicidado 3  125 KHZ REMOTE READERS FOR GROUP 1 TERMINALS ccc 4  MULTI MODE READERS miisi niiina teeter eee a ia a aE aia ti 5  125  KHZ EERMINALS  GROUP Zi a N E leeches 6  125 KHZ ANTENNA READERS FOR GROUP 2 TERMINALS           0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6  REGI
216. nted on All Allowed Events or All Denied Events by  selecting these from the drop down list     Reason Filter    Click the Reason check box and select the required Reason from the drop   down list which appears  This generates a Report of access records for the  Reason selected only  for the default time period on the current date     If a report on all Reasons is required  leave the Reason check box blank     The Use of Multiple Filters    Multiple Filters can be selected to more narrowly define the Access Report  information displayed  An example is shown below where both Location and  Person Filters have been selected     NOTE   A ways click Submit again after defining a filter     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  28  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       yates    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help      Heak                search  Favorites Bristory   Er S    Address  E  hetpijflocalhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreparts AccessReport y   co   uns  gt   Date from  2003704701 El to  2003707 717 E  Daily Time from 000000 to  235959  24 Hour Clock     Person  Arturo Fettucini     Location     Main Door       Other Filters                   F Department   F Tag No    I Event Type   F Reason Code      Name Filter   Arturo Fettucini   Date Filter   2003 04 01 to 2003 07 17  Time Filter   00 00 00 to 23 59 59  Location Filter   Main Door       Date En Ser Ss  Li   Location 
217. nter Sharing for Microsoft Networks  F Internet Protocol  TCP IP              KI K K       Install      Uninstall   Properties      Description       Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft  network           IT Show icon in taskbar when connected       OK   Cancel      Local Areas Connections Screen   22  Select Internet Protocol  TCP IP       23  TCP IP  Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol  is the data exchange  system that the IXP200 Access Control System uses      24  Click Install     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 15  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information          Internet Protocol  TCP IP  Properties    Server    3 SETVET           Internet Protocol  TCP IP  Properties Screen   25 1n order to work an IP address needs to be entered      26  Select Use the following address     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 16  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information       Internet Protocol  TCP IP  Properties 2 x     General         You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports  this capability  Otherwise  you need to ask your network administrator for  the appropriate IP settings        Obtain an IP address automatically           Use the following IP address     IP address    1
218. ntinue with the procedures under Lift   elevator  Control     6  In the Entry Terminal field  click Select in the middle pane  A Reader  Setting Dialog similar to that shown below is displayed  Consult the  Location Chart and then select the required Reader from the list  When  accepted  this data is then displayed in the Entry Terminal field     7  In the Reader Setting Dialog  click Apply to accept the Readers  or  Cancel to reject the Reader     NOTE   7o de select a Reader click on the Blank line           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  33  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       EN Reader Setting Ea  Name Fix Address   Logic Addr    Desc    00405474 01010109 ImproX Micro Remote  O04C546F 01010108  Improx Micro Remote  004C5468 01010107  Improx Micro Remote  00405469 01010106 Improx Micro Remote  004C5459 01010105 ImproX Micro Remote  004C5558 01010104  Improx LCD Keypad Terminal  Non progr       00405485 01010101 Improx Micro Remote   004C5BAF 01010202  Improx Keypad Remote   004C5480 0101010C ImproxX Keypad Remote   004C5BA0 01010201 ImproX Harsh Environment Micro Remote  0040547E 01010108 ImproX Harsh Environment Micro Remote    _9         Reader Setting Dialog       Reader Setting Dialog   Name   The type of hardware unit    Fixed Address   The Fixed Address of the unit    Logical Address    The assigned Logical Address of the unit    Description   Descr
219. nual   This is supplied together with this manual on the IXP200 Software CD  It  describes the installation of ImproX units to form a Hardware System  compatible with the IXP200 Software       mproX Unit Installation Chart  This is supplied with the IXP200 Controller Unit  It is intended to be used to    maintain a record of the physical location of every ImproX unit in the System     Graphics Designer Software User Manual  The Graphics Designer Software User Manual  XP331 0 0 GB XX is supplied  together with this manual     Designer Softw  r Manual  The Card Designer Software User Manual IXP333 0 0 GB XX is supplied  together with this manual     xi      XP200  Software User Manual  SECTION 1  SYSTEM OVERVIEW    Section 1   System Overview       IMPRO TECHNOLOGIES  PTY  LTD   SOFTWARE LI CENSE AGREEMENT       READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE    CONTAINING THE  ACCOMPANYING USER DOCUMENTATION  THE    PROGRAM         PROGRAM DISKETTES OR CD ROM  THE COMPUTER SOFTWARE THEREIN  AND THE    THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT REPRESENTS THE ENTIRE    AGREEMENT CONCERNING THE PROGRAM BETWEEN YOU AND IMPRO TECHNOLOGIES  PTY  LTD   THE LICENSOR     AND IT SUPERSEDES    ANY PRIOR PROPOSAL  REPRESENTATION  OR UNDERSTANDING BETWEEN THE PARTIES  BY    OPENING THE PACKAGE CONTAINING THE PROGRAM  YOU AND YOUR COMPANY  COLLECTIVELY    YOU     ARE    ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT     IF YOU ARE NOT WILLING TO BE B
220. o  Links      VO Device Configuration      Submit   Export Report  CSV     Return to the Configuration main page                               Devices Available    Configured Input Devices  Configured Output Devices    01010102 Bldg Management   ImproX 16 Channel Input Terminal  01010104 Lifts ImproX 16 Channel Output Terminal                         Configured Output Devices        E  Done PT    EE Local intranet    10 Device Configuration Report    This report lists configuration information for each Input and Output device in  the System     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 19    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Input Triggered Action Configuration Reports           Input Triggered Action Configuration      Microsoft Internet Explorer E 18  x   Ele Edit view Favorites Tools Help    Back         a   Qsearch CFavortes Media C4   aS   Address la http   localhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports  InputTAConfigReport h   Go   Links E                                                                                Input Triggered Action Configuration       4  Submit   Export Report  CSV      f 3  Return to the Configuration main page   M    No  Name   Sun  Mon   Tue  Wed   Thu   Fri   Sat   Hol  Start Time   Duration   Trigger Inputs ere  fe    me  e  e fe fe           0000 24 00 ia Relay  9 na a    x      oe a  os   0520 17 00 NS Relay  Return to the Configuration main 
221. o 5  ACCESSING AND USING THE REPORTS FACILITY cesce 6  DEFINING PARAMETERS IN A REPORT PAGE    8  EXPORTING REPORTS TO EXCEL    iii 9  REPORT DESCRIPTIONS ocio nn rene bnp he nr autos brest 9  ADMINISTRATOR  REPORTS  tisser rte de Porco ri 9  Archive Selector icon de att attendees 9  Configuration  Reports ala 10  DOOR AND ACCESS GROUP CONFIGURATION REPORTS    12  Common Report Screen Buttons                     ss 12  Access Group Configuration Report    ooocccnnicconncnncncnononnnnn nono nnrnnnn naar nn nn nn 13  Door Access Configuration Report    14  Door Configuration Report    15  Door Mode Configuration Report    16  Terminal Configuration Report    17  Reader Configuration Report    18  INPUTS AND TIME TRIGGERED CONFIGURATION REPORTS    scere 19  10 Device Configuration Report    19  Input Triggered Action Configuration Reports          cece eeeeeeeeeeeteaeees 20  Time Triggered Configuration Report    21  Tag Configuration Report    22  Tagholder Configuration Reports    23  TRANSACTION REPORTS    ie 24  Common Report Screen Buttons                               ss 24  Access Repo iii da 24  Alarm  Report sorina bhatt eila a ld inet dea 30  Status Reports ntl arse nent iether elton eo es 31  PERSON INFORMATION REPORTS    32  Hours Worked in APB Report            cteeeete eee ett etee eee eet e teeta aaa ates eeteeenaaeaes 32  Person  Access Pattern R pOrtis isccccisecnedenecscisvasietecceeeivecdiveteatieeceeeeeteeeys cone 33  Person RED OME aaan A ia ea aeaa a E E de
222. o ID  17  18  19   Buzzer  38  43  44   buzzer volume  38  43   Communication Status  9  19   COMMUNICATION STATUS  10   Controller  6  9  10  11  17  18  21   23  24  25  26  27  28  30  34   49  60  63   CONTROLLER  23   Day Mode Patterns  45   Door Entry Code  32  35  42  48   49   Door Entry Code Mode  35    Door Mode Pattern  35  44  45  46   47  54  55   DOS Mode  37   Editing  6  23  60  67  71   Emergency Unlock Mode  49   end date  28   Event  6  11  21  38  61  63  64   65  67  68  69  71  72   EVENT  63  68   Event Triggered Action  64  68  69   71  72   Fixed Address  17  32  34  41   Graphics  6  9  16  17   Graphics Designer  16  17   icons  6  11  12  16   Input  21  23  24  25  57  58  59   61  62  63  64  66  67  69  70   installation  5  7  17  21   Invalid tags  48   LED Action  38  43   LED Mode  49   LIFT  ELEVATOR   41   Locked Mode  48  49   Logical Address  17  19  34  43  57   58          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 3 72    Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions       Log on  18  20   menu  9  18  19  27  29  33  39   44  45  55  57  59  65  67  69   70  71  72   No Entry Mode  48  49   Output  21  23  43  44  57  58  59   60  62  63  67   PAC  49   Password  18  20   pathname  18   PC  5  6  17  19  23  26  27  28  59   PIN  46  48  49  55   Power Control  23  24  26  27   ProxPal  23  26  27   Record Transaction Mode  49   rel
223. o Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 15    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Door Mode Configuration Report        Door Mode Configuration      Microsoft Internet Explorer       File Edit View Favorites Tools Help  Back      gt  OA A  Qsearch Favorites   media   Er Sy                         Address ja http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports DoorModeConfigReport       Go  Links  gt       Y  Door Mode Configuration  y         Submit   Export Report  CSV     Return to the Configuration main page                              00 00 24 00 Tag No   No No Yes  00 00 05 00 Superviser Unlock No   Both No Yes  05 00 17 00 Tag No   No No Yes Flashing Green  17 00 24 00 Superviser Unlock No   Both No Yes Off  Blink Red       00 00 24 00 No Entry No No No Yes Red  Blink OF       00 00 06 00 Superviser Unlock No   No Entry Yes Off  Blink Red  06 00 17 00 Tag No   No No Yes No Green  17 00 24 00 Superviser Unlock No   No Entry Yes Off  Blink Red                                           00 00 24 00 Personal Access Code Mode  No No No Yes No Green  Blink Off  ST Eee  Door Mode Configuration Report       This report provides details of all Door Modes which have been defined for the  System     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  16    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Terminal Configuration Report    3  Terminal Configu
224. o start  monitoring the Event     c  Click in the Duration field cells  hh mm  to set the period of time that  the Event must be monitored        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 69  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 5   Time Event Triggered Actions        4  In the Monitored Inputs and State panel  proceed as follows      a  Click on the arrow icon of the Select Input field  this displays a list of  available inputs in the dropdown menu  select the required input   NOTE  More than one input can be chained and monitored for the same   event  and any of the Events can trigger the Action     b  Click on the arrow icon of the Select State field  this displays state  options in the dropdown menu  click on the required option to select the  state     c  Click   Icon to add the new Input selected above  to the list of  monitored inputs below  Repeat this step if additional inputs must be  monitored for this event     d  Click the   Icon to remove any Input highlighted in the list below from  the list of monitored inputs     5  In the Action field  click on the arrow button and select the required   Action  namely Relay or Message     6  Click Parameters  A dialog box appropriate to the Action selected will be  displayed  refer to Time Triggered Actions      NOTE   f Relay action is selected  the relay drive time can be set to an  indefinite period by entering 65535 as the relay duration    
225. ocedure         cccsceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42  Readerl   4 Tabs acta in 43  Readerl   4 Configuration Procedure    44  Day Mode    Setting voii conte cortina 44  Day Mode Configuration Procedure    44  Day Mod   Setting   2 122 220 tava cn a dant nan diva ai aioe dr te 45  DOOR MODE PATTERNS oirisem iaia una aaae 46  Default Door Mode Pattern    46  Door Mode Pattern Tab    47  DOOR MODE COMPATIBILITY 2 ccticccs sesestiseaxti atest ica ane 52  Configuring Door Mode Patterns   Procedure         cccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 54  Deleting an Existing Door Mode Pattern    59  Deleting a Time Slot iaiianra a aN Geen Eae 56  CHAPTER 4   INPUT OUTPUT TERMINALS n 57  GENERAL sisi Suc an i ted A E A AE AA AS 57  NUMBER OF TERMINALS IN A SYSTEM    57  BUILDING MANAGEMENT iii 57  LIFT  ELEVATOR  CONTROL  etes de edit eds remettre tienne te ea 57  1 0 TERMINAL CONFIGURATION   PROCEDURE    57  Input Output Terminals Panel Fields and Buttons sesser 58  INPUT OUTPUT TERMINAL CONFIGURATION    59  CONFIGURING AN OUTPUT TERMINAL   PROCEDURE    59  CONFIGURING AN INPUT TERMINAL   PROCEDURE    61  CHAPTER 5   TIME EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION CONFIGURATION    63  GENERAL sic cc2  mine ne dina da 63  ACTION TYPES inicia odiado 63  Time Triggered Actions    64  Event Triggered Actions    64  Time Event Panel Fields and Buttons scene 64  Time Triggered Actions Tab    0oonnnniniononnnnnnncninnnnann nono nnrnnnn nan rr 65  DayS Of Weeks  eine ri ne te pe eS is PP Re ne se 65  Select  Actio TYPE wis 58488
226. off line for more than 20 seconds  presenting an  Administrator Tag to the Controller will cause the Tagholders Menu to be  displayed     If the Controller memory is initialised or there are no Tags in the database  i e   when the Controller is received from the factory   press the Enter key to access  the menu  This allows the installer to use the menu to choose the Comms Port  Setting to be RS232 or RS485      1  To toggle between the Tagholders menu and the Settings menu  use the  Scroll up or Scroll down buttons    2  To Escape from either of these menus  use the F5 key           GENERAL POINTERS   FIRST LEVEL MENUS   a  The first menu to appear is the Tagholders menu    b  The Settings menu can only be entered from the Tagholders menu        EXAMPLE OF THE USE OF THE MANUAL EDITING FACILITY  Settings Menu Example    To illustrate the use of the facility  an example of the use of a Settings menu   the PC Comms menu  is explained here  A flow chart showing the use of the PC  Comms manual editing facility is included on the next page     NOTE  7he methods described here can be used to navigate all the available  menus and to select or modify data in those menus      1  Once the Controller is in Manual Edit Mode  the Tagholders menu will  immediately be displayed     2  Use the Scroll up key to toggle to the Settings menu     3  Use the Enter key to enter the Settings menu     4  Select the PC Comms menu using the Scroll up key     5  Enter the PC Comms menu using the Enter 
227. ogies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 76  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12       XP200  Software User Manual  SECTION 3  CONFI GURATI ON  PART B   Chapters 6 to 15     Section 3   System Configuration       SECTION 3 PART B   SYSTEM CONFI GURATION       CONTENTS   CHAPTER 6   ACCESS GROUP CONFIGURATION  oococccococcnncnccocnonannnnnnnnnnnnannns 83  General cic  Rios AE 83  Access Groups Security Levels    erennere 83  Access Groups Panel Fields and Buttons                               84  CONFIGURING AN ACCESS GROUP   PROCEDURE cocoocccccccccccocnonannnnnononon 85  Naming an Access Group   Procedure    85  Defining an Access Patterns mire nina nl tetes 86  Access Pattern Dialog    oooooooococnnnnonnnnonononcncnnnnnnanarn nor n cnn nr nana rr 86  Access Pattern   Day     Time Tab    86  Access Pattern  Door Tadeo enti 87  ACCESS PATTERN   FLOOR TAB    88  Adding More Access Patterns    89  Saving an Access Group    89  Editing an Existing Access Pattern    89  Deleting an Existing Access Pattern          cc cccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneaeeeees 89  Deleting an Access Group    90  CHAPTER 7   TAG HOLDER CONFIGURATION    91  GENERAL ia illa Made de tt 91  TAG LEVELS cd td 91  Tag Level Te   WiSitOF  ina aora 91  Tag  Level 2  Normalista ts 91  Tag Level 3    Supervisor                                               n nana naraninnnns 91  Tag Level 4    Administrator 0 00    terete eee tenaee eee eee eet 92  TACO en ee muni Mt nes bev en Ai ea eee ae 92  Tagho
228. omprehensive access to all System configuration graphics  and operating functions as well as reports and the card designer facility  Some  menu items display a dialog box when selected  which must be closed before  any other item can be selected     There is a Status Bar at the bottom of the window to display messages to the  user and two Status LED Indicators which display the current status of the  Database Connection and Communication to the Units     If an Auto ID has been done in the current session  a third LED indicator is  displayed on the Status Bar  This is an Auto ID Indicator button  clicking on the  button displays a logfile of the last Auto ID process     Auto ID  Database Connection and Communication Status I cons    Three LED Icons indicate the status of these parameters  When the System is  not functioning correctly these Icons change color  indicating that a problem  exists  The Icons are located at the bottom right hand corner of the Main  Application Window     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       Auto ID Status  Green All Terminals were found and configured     Amber New Terminals were found but are not configured        Red Some Terminals are configured but were not found     Database Connection I con  Green The System is connected to the Database     LI Red A loss of connection to databa
229. on       a 101 x     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help       Ea Wie SIFY    Door Door Mode Pattern         1 Default Tag Mode  2  Weekday    3  Holiday     4  Weekend         Pattern Name   Default Tag Mode    Pattern Time Slot          Start Time End Time Mode  PIN  Reason    Dual Tag   Record Denied Alarm   LED   No No No  Ves Io Red     00 00  24 00  Tag                            Transactions   Alarms    Seq Date Time Terminal Event Name Tag          Door Mode Pattern Panel  repeated for clarity     Configuring Door Mode Patterns   Procedure     1  Click on the Door Mode Pattern tab  A Door Mode Pattern Panel  similar to that shown above will be displayed  For a new site the list has  only one entry     Default Tag Mode     which cannot be edited or deleted  It  is assigned by default to any new door  unless the user defines and selects  a new pattern     2  Click Add     in the top pane  The System allocates a new pattern  number and highlights the new entry     3  In the middle pane select the Pattern Name field  and type in the  required description  The description should be appropriate and unique to  ensure that it is not confused with other descriptions     4  The Start Time Field defaults to midnight  and is therefore  00 00     The Start Time field cannot be changed manually  it will change  automatically to match the End Time of the previous Time Slot  The first  field that can be changed manually is the End Time field to begin y
230. on Chapter 1   Introduction       Door Status Panel    This panel may be accessed by clicking the Door Status tab in the  Transaction View panel in the lower part of the screen     A IXP200  ioj x   File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help                   5iFactory  Door   Entry   Exit    Number  ko Elevator lift Door f  Name   Main Entrance  Entry Terminal  Loco Select   Alarm Arm    Enable    Exit Terminal  oosest E  MR  Select APB Mode  C Relax     Strict       APB Zone  O Door Entry Code    Enable Bell Ta          Transactions   Alarms Door Status      Open All    iE  Main Entrance   Close All    E Admin    Refresh    a South Door       Door Status Panel    NOTE  7he proper functioning of this panel requires that door open sensors  are installed on each door     This panel shows an icon for each door in the System  A label next to the icon  indicates the name of the door  The current state of the door is reflected by the  icon displayed  The state of the door can only be fully ascertained if a door  open sensor has been installed on the door     NOTE  This panel will initially be blank for a new System after the doors have  been configured  Click the Refresh button to display the door icons     There are four possible states or conditions  namely        June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction            
231. on of an input to be monitored    Select State   Allows selection of the state of the input that  will trigger the Action    Plus button   Chains new input with those already  monitored for this Event    Minus Button   Removes selected input from those  monitored for this Event    Channel No  Name  State   List of inputs being monitored for this Event  any of which could trigger the Event   Input No    Input Channel Number    Input Name   Input Name    State   Trigger state    ACTION   Select Action Type   The type of Action that will occur when  triggered by a monitored Event  namely  Relay or Message    Parameters   Displays a dialog box to further define the  Action    Apply   Accepts the new data into the Systems  database    Cancel   Cancels the new entry or refreshes an  existing one     EVENT TRIGGERED ACTION CONFI GURATI ON   PROCEDURE   To configure an Event Triggered Action  proceed as follows      1  Click on the Action icon on the toolbar or select from the Configuration  drop down menu  The Event Triggered Action Panel similar to that  shown above is displayed  For a new site the list is empty     2  Click New  this clears the Event Triggered Action cell  click in the cell  and type in the descriptive name for the new Event Action     3  In the Period of Operation panel  proceed as follows      a  Click on the buttons in the Days of Week field to select the days when  the Event must be monitored     b  Click in the Start Time field cells to set the time  hh mm  t
232. on the Tags may result in poor quality printing        Adding a Tagholder  Continuation    Tag Data     1  Click on the Tag tab  The New Tagholder   Tag Tab  with No Tag dialog  similar to that shown below is displayed     2  Click Add to add a new Tag  A blank Tag panel will be displayed     3  Refer to the example shown with data entered     2 New Tag Holder f x        New Tagholder   Tag Tab  with No Tag          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  99  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       Tag Holder  Tanya Johnson x     General   Details Tag   Operator      Tag  1 I Suspend TF Reset APB  Number  fe Read Tag   Type   Personal Access Code Y  Start Date  van1 2003    Level  Mistor E  Start Time   oo Joo   Access Group     crin v Expiry Date  Dec 31  2003    Usage    Expiry Time  Ps a  Message                           _8   6       New Tagholder   Tag Tab  with Tag    New Tagholder   Tag Tab    Number    Read Tag button    Type  Level  Suspend  Reset APB    Start Date  Expiry Date    Start Time    Expiry Time    Displays the unique Tag code number of the  current Tag     NOTE   When using a fingerprint as a Tag  this  number must be allocated by the user     Allows the Tag code of a Tag presented to the  Controller or Tag Reader to be read and displayed  in the Number field     The type of the Tag    The level allocated to the Tag    Checked if all access for the Tag is su
233. onfiguration      Microsoft Internet Explorer  laj x   File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back     gt      A A  search Gyravorites meda  4   B S   address      hitp  flocahostiwebreports servietinet improipx2 web webreparts TagConfigReport   GO  Links  gt                       Tag Configuration           Submit   Export Report  CSV     Return to the Configuration main page    Juliet Summerfield Normal Personal Access Code   Date N A   Date N A No      Tag Code  Es    208038343237  James Nigel Haines Visitor SlimTag  bytes   Date N A   Date N A No   208038347205   208038349100                      John Walton   Laboratory Normal Slim Tag  5 bytes   2001 12 10   2005 12 10 No Admin  William Newton Admin  Administrator   SlimTag  bytes   2002 05 01   2005 12 31 No Supervisor  Arturo Fettucini Admin  Administrator   SlimTag  bytes   2003 06 13   2008 06 30 No Supervisor   Clara Calisto Admin Supervisor Slim Tag  5 bytes   2001 12 10   2005 12 10 No Supervisor                                        Return to the Configuration main page          Tag Configuration Report    This report provides a list of all Tags issued  together with the Access Group  which has been assigned to each Tag     Data can be sorted by clicking on the appropriate column heading     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  22    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Tagholder Configuration Reports        Tag Holder Conf
234. or  CSV  1  4 1 al Le  Return to the Web Reports Main page sy ja  Select View     Table    Calendar 3  Ka  4 A    Start Date  mwad      End Date  mwad      Holiday Name       0101 D1 01 New Year s Day  12 25 12 25 Christmas Day  01 23 01 23 Peace Day FE   03 13 03 13 Family Day    05 01 05 01 Labour Day    08  09 08  09 National Women s Day    Return to the Web Reports Main page    4     gt   al id  al Done aa ES Local intranet  Holiday Report   Table format  See next page  June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  42      IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Reason Code Report      Reason Code Report    Microsoft Internet Explorer le xj    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      A A  Search Favorites   media  lt 4  Eh  G  Address ja http  localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2  web  webreports ReasonCodeReport hd Go  Links      Reason Code Report                           Submit   Export Report  CSV     Return to the Web Reports Main page    Medical  Business visit                         Personal       Return to the Web Reports Main page          Reason Code Report    This Report lists the System Reason Codes and their designated meanings     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 43    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports          INDEX  address  8 IXP200 program  6  7  Administrator  5  9  10 LAN  6  7  column 
235. or  one Door Mode Pattern is allocated to each day of the week  plus holidays     These patterns allow      a  The operating mode  door status  for a door to be set differently for  various periods in a day      b  A PIN to be required at the door at selected times   The requirement that dual Tags be presented for access      d  With the above options  it is possible to further Restrict Relax the access  requirements for all Tags that use a door by using a Door Mode  even  though the Tags have their own Access Group allocated        O         Administrator and Supervisor Tags are not affected by the APB setting of the  door     The default Door Mode Pattern is shown below   This pattern is always available in the System and is allocated by default when a    new door is configured  If a different pattern is required  it must first be  defined and then allocated        Default Door Mode Pattern  Slot Number  gt  Sk  Start Time Slot   00 00  End Time Slot   24 00  Door Mode   Tag  PIN required   No  Reason code required   No  Dual Tag required   No  Record Allowed Transactions   Yes  Alarm on Denied Transactions   No  LED   Red     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 46    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       Each Door Mode Pattern is made up as described below        101 x     File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports Card Designer Help       Door Door Mode P
236. or to be configured    Delete   This button removes the selected entry from the list     Door Tab Panel   Middle Pane    Number   The new door number or that of the selected door in  the top pane    Lift  elevator    When ticked  checked   defines this door as a lift   Door  elevator  lift  elevator  group    Name   The name of the selected door in the top pane    Entry Terminal   Entry Reader Terminal Fixed Address    Exit Terminal   Exit Reader Terminal Fixed Address    Select   Displays the Reader Setting Dialog    APB  Anti    The Zone number for this APB door  0 means no   Pass Back  APB     Zone   Day Mode   Displays Day Mode Setting Dialog    Alarm Arm   Enabled if door must be armed    APB Mode   Off  Relaxed or Strict    Door Entry   The Code required for access at this Door during Door   Code Entry Code mode    Enable Bell   The Door Configuration Panel now shows a check box    to enable a bell  The bell is only available if the door  is assigned a Reader which is a Twin Antenna Mullion  Reader  This Reader has a bell pushbutton    Tick  check  the check box to enable the bell to  operate with relay 2  Relay 1 will then operate  with the door strike for both Readers   f the box  is not checked  then the relays operate as normal        Apply   This button accepts the new door or edited data into  the System      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 32    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Ch
237. ord Transaction Mode    e This initiates the recording of the Allowed Transaction i e  Access Allowed  in     e All denied Transactions are recorded  irrespective of this setting     e All Transactions must be downloaded on a regular basis  If the Controller  buffer is full the oldest Transaction is deleted     e A Transaction records the following data      Date  Time  Door  Tag No   Unique Master No   Allowed or Denied code   and a user configured Reason code  if any      Denied Alarm Mode   e This only applies when the System is in Alarm mode and is Armed    e The alarm relay is operated for 3 minutes  and an appropriate message is  displayed on the Controller   s LCD    e A Transaction is recorded  identifying the Tagholder who was denied  access  Only invalid Tags will generate an alarm     e The Supervisor and Administrator Tagholders can acknowledge  clear  the  alarm at the Controller              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 51  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration             LED Mode    This sets the specific color or mode that the Reader Status LED must display  during this Door Mode  The User can set any type of format that is required     SPECI AL MODES  In addition  there are 2 other special modes  Emergency Unlock and Alarm   armed  These are described below     Emergency Unlock Mode   This mode is initiated from software  or from the Controller
238. our own  Door Pattern     5  Click the End Time field  and edit the End Time settings to the pattern  required           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 54  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration             Notes on End Time field    a  This field defaults to 24 00  ensuring a full day period     b  This field identifies the end of a particular mode for a door    c  This time is set to a 1 minute resolution      d  When altering the End time of a specific slot  1 of 8 possible settings      therefore   e Anew next slot number is generated   e The End time of the slot is forced to be the Start time of the next     e The default parameters are loaded for the next slot  the slot being    modified already has the default parameters         NOTE   After every time change or selection from a combo box  press Enter to  accept the entry in that cell      6  Click the Mode field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed  Use  the mouse to select the setting for the time slot      7  Click the PIN field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed  Use the  mouse to select the setting for the time slot      8  Click the Reason field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed  Use  the mouse to select the setting for the time slot      9  Click the Dual Tag field to select it  A dropdown menu will be displayed   Use the mouse to select the setting for the time slot
239. out notice Page 1 6             Section 1   System Overview          Table 6   125 kHz Antenna Readers for Group 2 Terminals       These Antenna Readers can be used with the ImproX TT  MfTor DBv           Harsh Environment Keypad Antenna          ImproX KHA Reader    ImproX KMA Remote Mullion Keypad Antenna  Reader    ImproX MA Micro Antenna Reader           ImproX MHA    q    Metal Antenna Reader           ImproX MMA          Mullion Antenna Reader        REGI STRATI ON I NTERFACE AND READERS       Table 7   Registration I nterface and Registration Readers       The ImproX RS can be used with either the ImproX RRA  for 125 kHz Tags  or    RRM  for Mifare or FeliCa Tags                          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 7    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12           Section 1   System Overview          Table 7   Registration I nterface and Registration Readers       The ImproX RS can be used with either the ImproX RRA  for 125 kHz Tags  or    RRM  for Mifare or FeliCa Tags        ImproX RS  USB  Registration  Interface  Metal    Provides two functions    USB to RS485 conversion  and    Allows for the connection of an  ImproX Mifare Remote Reader or 125       Registration  Remote Reader   Mifare    Housing kHz Remote Reader for Tag  Registration   see also ImproX RRA   RRM     ImproX RRM     Reads Mifare Tags  It is used with the  ImproX RS        ImproX RRA   Registration  Reader Antenna   125 kHz    BREAD          Reads 1
240. ow you to enter and edit text    within the current menu data field                0     to  D O          Alphanumeric entry  backspace   to  9  Numeric entry  backspace     OK   This key accepts any new data    Cancel   This key cancels any new data and  refreshes the existing data    Alphanumeric Entry     1      2      3    4     Press the key that has the desired character  If the character that you  want is not the first to be displayed  press the key again within 1 second  before the blinking cursor appears  to display the next character    If a character is missed then keep pressing the key until it appears again or  press the key to delete the character s      If the required new character is on the same key then wait 1 second until  the blinking cursor appears  then select the desired character    If the required new character is on a different key then that key can be  selected immediately  The cursor will move to the next position  automatically     MENUS    General    The    Manual Edit Facility is organised in a menu tree as shown in the following    diagrams     As you make selections in the menus  the Controller LCD information changes  accordingly  The LCD will display information appropriate to the menu selected     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 8  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities                     Explanation     Information Displayed   Options Available  Next Higher Men
241. page j     o       E  Done Jai juni    EE Local intranet      Input Triggered Action Configuration Report    This report provides a list of all monitored inputs  the time periods during which  they are monitored  the trigger condition and the type of action that follows  each trigger     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  20  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Time Triggered Configuration Report    2    Time Triggered Action Configuration      Microsoft Internet Explorer       File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back  gt     gt      A A  search Egravorites meda   E    S  Address ja http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports  TimeTAConfigReport ha Eao   Links                   Time Triggered Action Configuration      Submit   Export Report  CSV     Return to the Configuration main page    ay Switch board to night service   jejej   17 00   a Switch board to day service 7   a   di 07 45                                                          Return to the Configuration main page             a FETE  Time Triggered Action Configuration Report    This report provides a list of Time Triggered Actions and the times at which they  have been configured to occur     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 21    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Tag Configuration Report    Z   Tag C
242. pe by any of the registration devices  However  each UHF Tag also has a Slim  Tag code of the same value as the UHF Tag code      1  To register such a Tag  read it in as a Slim Tag  using the registration  device    change its Type to RF and save it      2  If the Tag is also required to be read as a Slim Tag  read it in again and  select its Type as Slim Tag  The Tagholder now effectively has two Tags   with the same Tag code  that are distinguished by their Type  for use at  different Reader types     Registering Fingerprints as Tags     1  Fingerprints cannot be read by any of the registration devices  A SAGEM  MorphoAccess MA200  Automatic Fingerprint Recognition Terminal   or  similar device   refer to the IXP System compatible Biometric Reader User  and Installation Manual for further details  is required for this purpose  To  register a fingerprint as a Tag  proceed as described in the above Manual     Registering Personal Access Codes  PACs  as Tags    A Personal Access Code is effectively a Tag  and can be used instead of a Tag at  doors that are set to the Personal Access Code Mode  A PAC is captured in the  same way as any other Tag in the Tag Tab of the Tagholder dialog box     Each PAC must be a number from 1 to 9 digits in length  and must be unique  in that no other Tagholder can have the same PAC     NOTE   Each PAC must start with a non zero numeral  A PAC with leading  zero s will be disallowed by the System     A PAC can be used instead of a Tag at any doo
243. pervisor Unlock  Door Entry Code   Personal Access Code  No Entry and  Locked are the main modes  which can be  selected for a door  see Door Mode  Pattern   In addition PIN code  Reason  code or Dual Tag may be required   Armed mode can be set when the  Controller is armed           June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 2    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM    Door Mode Pattern    Dual Tag Access    Engine Workstation    Editing Workstation    Event    Event Triggered Action    Fixed Address    Host Bus    Host PC    EXPLANATION    Defines a set of consecutive Time Slots for  a day  24 hrs   Each Time Slot defines a  mode which determines the operation of  the door during that period  A door is  assigned a Door Mode Pattern for each day  of the week and holidays     The Operator can select whether one or  two Tags are required for entry or exit   that is two persons must be present to  open a door     The PC on which the IXP200 software is  installed  and which communicates with  the  XP200 Controller     A separate PC  additional to the Engine  Workstation  on which the   XP200 software  is installed  but which is not connected to  the system hardware  and therefore does  not communicate with the 1IXP200  Controller  This PC is only used for editing  the database     An occurrence that is recognised by the  system as a trigger for a system Action     An externally initiated occurrence tha
244. quicker than upgrading unit by unit  but carries the risk of a larger  portion of the System being out of commission if there is a problem updating   whereas only a single unit would otherwise be affected  It is safer to use this  method when installing a new System than when updating a functioning  System     All units  one at a time     It is advisable to select all units  one at a time  when upgrading a System in  use for the reasons stated in the previous paragraph     Other Information  Controller LA    For IXP200 Systems  the Controller LA will always be 01     Terminal LA    Type in the last two characters of the required Terminal   s Logical Address     Force Upgrade    This is necessary  for example  where the file version of the firmware is not  newer than the currently installed firmware version     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 7  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       SYSTEM TOOLS   A Firmware up  rade al    File Config File Versions Help      Firmware Upgrade   System Tools   Misc               Comms Test  Ping No  Of Cycles  1 ee  Reset UMMCLA jor o     Test adv                            System Tools    Ping Test   The Ping Test tests communications with all units in the System  and provides  a report on each unit including the current firmware version installed    It is normally used before performing a firmware upgrade to est
245. quired as described below      4  Search options are provided to locate a Tagholder in a large table  Search  by any of the items stored for the Tagholder  For example  search by Last  Name and start typing the required name in the Value box  The selected  row moves to locate the name matching the entry in the Value box  e g   typing M then u then r etc   locates the first Tagholder with the last name  starting with M  then Mur and so on   This search facility is case sensitive      NOTE   7his search requires the first  or any  line to be selected before  starting    5  The alternative method of finding the record  if the Tag is available  is to    search by Tag  A Read Tag button and a Find button appear next to the  Value box           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 110  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders        6  Place the Tag on the Controller tag Reader and click Read Tag  The Tag  code appears in the Value box      7  Click Find to locate the owner Tagholder  The Tagholder may have several  Tags  so locate the Tag matching the Tag code in the Value box        Tag Holder  John Walton E x       Details   Tag   Operator      First Name  John   Last Name   rata   Pin  o  5 numbers   Company   Excel Products SCS Products   Note                 Tagholder General Tab for Editing    For existing Tagholders  the following additional buttons appear on the    Tagholder Dialo
246. r  Reason and or  Dual Tag may be specified during setup  but  all of these settings will be ignored by the System as no Tag is  accepted during this Mode           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 52  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Chapter 3   Door Configuration    Section 3   System Configuration        pawe SI WA SAS  pue SPON 100    104 UO pesuer  paluag UO uuey IPS  pue apo  wey Ul SI 181 01U0D  pue Bulle uuejy 104 pajqeua si 100    AN      USYM pijeA   juo s   uonejuasauld 6e   Umouxun pajuap UO pajea We     wey palusg        S3POWN Ile 104 pa qesip palqeus aq ued suorpesuel  pamojy JO BuIpioday    p10D9Y          5100Q EV UUM PIIEA JON       Se 1   eng         S USLULUOD   suondo spo                                         e SoA Ge L am AjUO Ge L yum AIUO OPON 2P0D SSSDDY  PUOSISd  Ge L UM AIUO Ge L UM AIUO 6e L UM AIUO apo 2P09   nuyg 100  6e L UM AIUO 6e L yum AIUO Ge L UM AIUO 2pON MON U2dO   Be  plea 1514 UO SuddO Be 1 yym AjUO peL yum AIUO Ge 1 yym AJUO apo u  do  SOA SOA SOA opon AQUA ON  po1d555e Be  ON pesoub   pesoub   pesoub   PON papol  SOA SOA SOA Spo  APUN sosi uedns  SOA SA SOA epon be   SJUSUILUOT  fe    eng  uoseoy  Nid  apo  100     suondo pon                   SNO LLdO ANY SAGOW YOOd 319 LLVdINOD    3 53    Page    Data subject to change without notice       June 2007 Impro Technologies             IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configurati
247. r  more days of the week  The System defaults to a daily backup at 1 a m    01 00       10  The backup will take place automatically at the scheduled times  A status  message will be displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the main  frame when backup is in progress     Immediate Backup   1  Click on Backup Now to perform a backup independent of the preset  scheduled times      2  Observe the Status Bar in the main frame for messages     IMPORTANT NOTE   Please note that backup executes within IXP200 so the  XP200 application must  be running at this time for the backup to execute     The default backup folder is  XP200 database but another folder can be  selected     USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 151  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 15   Database Backup       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 152  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 16   Database Archive       CHAPTER 16   ARCHIVE    GENERAL  The IXP200 Software provides the facility to archive data in the database     CREATING AN ARCHIVE    To create an Archive of the database  use the separate Archive utility in the  IXP200 folder  A shortcut will have been created in the Programs menu  Log on  as the System Administrator when prompted      1  Close all other applications that may be accessing
248. r Open Timer  29  Editing keys  8  Emerg Unlock  23  Escape  6  10  existing data  8  F5  10  fingerprint  29  31  flow chart  10  23    Host Bus  25   IXP200  3  5  31   LCD  5  8  9  14  27  Lock All Doors  23  Manual Edit Mode  10  Manual Editing menu  9  Menu navigation keys  5  menu system  5   menu tree  5  8   new data  8   Numeric entry  8  off line  5  10   Open All Doors  23  PC software  5  13  peripheral device  29  PIN  15  20   resetting  26   RS232  10  25   RS485  10  25   Sagem  29  31   Select keys  6  sub menus  10  14  15  tag related information  15  use by installers  27          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page 6 31    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   32  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6   33  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       USER   S NOTES          IXP308 0 0 GB 11       Issue 12       June 2007       k  Custman  ImproNet Access   English Manuals     IXP200 system swm en 12 Section 6 doc             June 2007 Impro Technologies    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Page    6   34         XP200  Software User Manual    SECTION 7  GLOSSARY OF TERMS    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       SECTION 7   GLOSSARY OF TERMS    This section conta
249. r System   Terminals per  XP200 Controller  Zones per IXP200 Controller  Tagholder Levels   Door Modes   Day Mode Patterns   Access Groups   Access Group Patterns  Standalone Capability    Doors with Anti passback    2 000  4  8 000    1  40  16  4  9  26  64  8    Off line access control after initial  configuration using PC  manual editing  of some functions  including Tags     16       Emergency Unlock All doors  Public Holidays 20   Messages 255   Message Length 64 characters  Time Triggered Actions 32   Input Event Triggered Actions 16   Digital Outputs for Lifts 4x16   elevators    floors   Digital Inputs for Building Man  1x 16  agement Services   Digital Outputs for Building Man  1x16  agement Services      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 12    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       Compatible Registration Readers    Tag registration in an IXP200 System can be done using one of several ImproX  units as shown in the following table                             TAG TYPES TAGS TYPES NOT  UNIT ACCEPTED BY THIS ACCEPTED BY THIS  UNIT UNIT  IXP200 Controller 125 kHz Tags  Mifare Tags  Infra red  Tags  UHF Tags  FeliCa  Tags   ImproX ProxPal 125 kHz Tags  Infra red   Mifare Tags  UHF Tags   Tags  FeliCa Tags   ImproX RS USB 125 kHz Tags  Mifare Tags  UHF Tags   Registration Interface Infra red Tags FeliCa Tags   with an ImproX RRA  Registration Reader  Antenna  ImproX RS USB Mifare Tags  FeliCa Tag
250. r s access is to be temporarily suspended  click on the  Suspend box  A tick appears in the box      5  To reset the APB status of the Tag in the Controller to neutral  click the  Reset APB check box     i  Leave the check box unchecked for a new Tag    ii  Check this box  if necessary  to correct the APB status of an existing  Tag that conflicts with the current status in the Controller      6  The Start Date field can be left blank for indefinite validity  If a Start Date  is required click on the arrow icon in the Start Date field  A Calendar Dialog  similar to that shown below is displayed     August DIET       3    17                      Typical Calendar Dialog     a  Click on the Month arrow icon  this displays a dropdown menu  Select  the appropriate month     b  Click on the Year arrow icon  this displays a dropdown menu  Select  the appropriate year     c  Click on the Date required in the grid  This closes the Calendar  Dialog  and displays the data in the Start Date Field     NOTE  7o quit the calendar window without choosing a date press the escape  button on the keyboard           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  104  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       The start and expiry date can be deleted by highlighting the date and  pressing the Delete button on the keyboard      7  The Expiry Date field can be left blank for indefinite validity  If an Expiry  
251. r that has a keypad Reader and  that is operating in Personal Access Code Mode     NOTE   A PAC is not to be confused with a PIN  that is not a Tag but a  Personal Identification Number used by a Tagholder in conjunction  with a Tag for extra security  for example  in Tag   PIN Mode      When first entered in the System the PAC number will be displayed  but once  accepted will be displayed in the form        to maintain security  Only  thePAC holder will then know the actualPAC number  The PAC will also be  displayed as       in reports and in Transaction View     To register a PAC as a Tag  proceed as follows               June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 102  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders              1  From the keyboard  enter the PAC number in the Tag Number field     2  Select the type as Personal Access Code     3  Click Apply to accept the number  The number will now be displayed in the  form RAK E    Using Personal Access Codes with APB    When a PAC is used to enter an APB Zone  the same PAC must be used to exit  the zone  in the same way that the same physical Tag must be used to enter  and exit an APB Zone     Support for Devices using Wiegand Tag Codes    A normal Slim Tag may be used as a Wiegand Tag to interface with certain  biometric devices  that require the Wiegand format  Also  certain types of  Wiegand Tags may be used as Tags in the IXP200 Syst
252. ration    Microsoft Internet Explorer lej x   File Edit View Favorites Tools Help      Back    gt     Y A   Qsearch Gyravorites meda  4   ES   amp   Address ja http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports  TerminalConfigReport       Go  Links  gt     Terminal Configuration                               Export Report  CSV                  mw  a     5  Q  i  a  E  B  3  E  k i  3  a                                                                                                                   Logical Address   Fined Address   Enabled   Type  ITU  0040545 Yes MR ImproX Micro Remote    o1o1o102 000F43B0 Yes 16 ImproX 16 Channel Input Terminal   01010103 O04C51EE Yes KHR ImproX Harsh Environment Keypad Remote   ions 004c5558 Yes DL ImproX LCD Keypad Terminal  Non programmable    piers 0040559 Yes MR ImproX Micro Remote  PF ororoms EN  004c5469 No MR ImproX Micro Remote   pioioioy   004c546B No MR ImproX Micro Remote  FA ororoms   004C546F Yes MR ImproX Micro Remote  Fooros   00405474 Yes MR ImproX Micro Remote  EDITION 004Cc5358 Yes 016 ImproX 16 Channel Output Terminal   biotite 00405480 Yes KR ImproX Keypad Remote  FO ololo1oc O04C547E Yes MHR ImproX Harsh Environment Micro Remote  Return to the Configuration main page    E  Done FF    EE Local intranet    Terminal Configuration Report    This report provides a list of all Terminals identified by the Controller during  Auto ID  It shows the type and the addresses for each Terminal     See next page       J
253. red and must  conform to certain minimum requirements in order to be used by the utility   Each Table has a specific name and format  The only tables suitable for  importing data are the Department and Master tables    The MASTER table comprises the following fields which store the details of each  person                                             MST_SQ  PK  Integer Not Null  Master sequence number  to identify this record    MST _PIN Integer Null  PIN number    MST FIRST NAME   Varchar 20  Null   MST LAST NAME Varchar 20  Not Null   MST _ID Varchar 16  Null  1D number    MST ADDRESS Varchar 65  Null   MST DOB Integer Null  Date of Birth  yyyymmdd    MASTER Table fields      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 11    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 5   Utilities Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility                      MST COMPANY Varchar 20  Null  Company name   DPT NO  FK  Smallint Null  Department number     NOTE    fa Department is entered in the MASTER record  it must exist  in the Department table   MST_EMP Varchar 16  Null  Employee number or des   cription                 MASTER Table fields  continued     The DEPARTMENT table format comprises the following fields which store the  details of each department                        DPT NO Smallint Not Null   DPT NAME Varchar 20  Not Null  DEPARTMENT Table fields   DEFI NI TI ONS    Not Null means that the data must be provided  Null implies that the data is  option
254. red in this      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 26    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       field    Controller Enabled   Toggles the Controller on or off  if off  the  Controller is not polled by the PC    Apply Daylight Savings   This option  together with the Set Daylight    Saving button  allows the Controller to  implement daylight saving when off line to    the PC    Apply   This button saves new data to the System  database and to the    Proxette properties     file    Cancel   This button cancels the field selection and    any newly typed in data     NOTE 1    Refer to information under Communications  Controller to Host  PC  in Section 2 of this manual for details of these connections     Configuring the Controller   Procedure    To configure the Controller  proceed as follows       1  Click the General System Setup icon on the toolbar or select from the  Configuration dropdown menu  A Controller Panel similar to that shown  previously will be displayed      2  In the Controller Port field  select the required serial port  COM1 or COM2   to connect the PC to the Controller  either directly or through the ProxPal  unit or ImproX RS      3  In the ProxPal Registration Reader Enabled field  select    Yes    to enable the  ProxPal Desktop Tag Reader  ImproX USB    Registration Reader     if either  of these units is installed in your System   These u
255. requires a PIN  allocated to the particular Tagholder  of up             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 50  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration             to 5 digits to be entered  after the Tag has been presented  at applicable  doors  If the PIN is less than 5 digits    must be entered after the last  digit    e Configuring a particular door to require a PIN as well as presentation of a  Tag enhances the security of the door in that area     e If the allocated pattern of the door requires PIN entry  but the installed  Reader does not have a keypad  the System would then allow access to  Tagholders without requesting a PIN     e When dual Tags are required  both Tagholders must enter their PINs     e When a valid Tag is presented  the Tagholder   s PIN entry must be  completed within 20 seconds     e A short beep can be heard from the buzzer indicating that a PIN is  required       Reason Mode    e In this mode  a 1  or 2  digit Reason Code must be entered via the  Reader keypad after the Tag is presented at applicable doors     e Configuring a particular door to require a Reason Code as well as  presentation of a Tag provides a record of reasons for staff movements       Dual Tag Mode    e Any two Tagholders with valid access must present their Tags  consecutively to gain access     e A 20 second period is allowed for the presentation of the second Tag   Rec
256. requires an  ImproX RRA RS232 link  a Prox Pal registration Reader must be  Tapro Registration used in place of the ImproX RS      a Emergency Unlock     Alarm READY    Alarm ARM     Alarm ARMED    A AS       uri    IXP200    Power control is  Controller an alternative    RS485 Terminal Bus    ImproX KHA  CHE    r conditioning on off control    Request to Exit       Lights on off control  RTE   x Push but  Roller Door drive on off control  h X 016  Output Terminal    Air cond  Overheat indicatior ImproX KHR  Keypad Remote  Reader    DOOR 3 is dedicated  to LIFTS in this example       Roller Door Open indication       SIMPLE BUILDING MANAGEMENT  Example             gt     To hit control  3rd partyk    Block diagram of a typical   XP200 System          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 11  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       The system shown above includes only one PC  the Host  No Database Server  PC or Editing Workstation PC is used in this example     NOTES      1  Other units are currently being developed that may be used in an IXP200    System     2  For details of the interconnection of the Hardware units  please refer to the  1XP200 Hardware Installation Manual     SYSTEM INFORMATION    System Features    NOTE   7he figures quoted here indicate the maximum System capacity     Total number of Tags  Tags per Tagholder    Total number of buffered trans     actions per IXP200 Controller  Sites pe
257. resenting his Tag to the    Out             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 7 1  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM    Auto ID process    Controller    Database Server  Default Tag Mode  Detected Unit    Door    Door Entry Code    Door Mode    EXPLANATION    Reader Terminal and  without physically  exiting the Zone  passing it to a person  outside the Zone and thus allowing that  person to gain entry to that Zone illegally     A process whereby the ImproX hardware  installed at a Site is detected  identified  and assigned Logical Addresses     A unit which is a Master of the Terminals  connected to it  The Controller  operating  on Events generated by Terminals   determines the resultant Actions taken by  the Terminals     A Controller acts as an interface between  the system Host PC s  and the system  Terminals  It performs control functions  such as the real time control of access to  the system  and maintains databases for  system activities     A server which contains the database for a  system     The Mode assigned to a new door if no  other mode is specified     Hardware unit detected on the bus     An access point controlled by 1 or 2 Reader  Terminals  one for entry and one for exit   see Access Point      Global code for a particular door  Valid  when door is in Door Entry Code mode    Qualifies the access allocated to a Tag  A  mode is specific to a particular door Open   Tag  Su
258. riod of time  minimum 2 digits 20   2 seconds  the Action must be  active  Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or click Cancel  to reject new data  This is essential     NOTE  Changing to another panel before clicking on the lift  elevator  control  Door Panels Apply button  would result in the new entry being  rejected     Day Mode Setting    A default Door Mode Pattern is assigned for all 7 days of the week when a new  door is configured     If the user does not want to use the default pattern  new patterns may be  defined using the Door Mode Pattern Tab  When any required new Door Mode  Patterns have been configured  see    Configuring Door Mode Patterns    Procedure     carry out the procedure described below     Day Mode Configuration Procedure    To configure Day Modes  proceed as follows       1  Click on the Door Tab and click the Day Mode button in the middle pane   The Day Mode Setting Dialog similar to that shown below is displayed           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 44  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration       FA Day Mode Setting             Day   Door Mode Pattern   i  Sunday  Defau It Tag Mode    nday Default Tag Mode Cancel    Tuesday  Defau it Tag Mode  dnesday   Default Tag Mode  Thursday  Defau it Tag Mode  riday Default Tag Mode Copy to All  Saturday  Defau It Tag Mode  Holiday  Defau It Tag Mode  Day Mode Setting Dialog  Da
259. roup and    the Door Mode               NOTE  The Security Level restricts the type of Access Group which  can be allocated to a Tag  High Security Access Groups are only  available to Tag Levels 3 and 4  Supervisor and Administrator   Low  Security Access Groups are available to all four Tag Levels  including  to levels 1 and 2  Normal and Visitors               Allocation of Access Conditions to a Tag    ACCESS CONTROL    Access Control is effected by means of a Tag allocated to a person  which must    be presented to the Readers at a door     The Tag identifies the person to the    IXP200 Controller and access is then allowed according to certain rules as  shown in the diagram Allocation of Access Conditions to a Tag     Access is allowed according to the following rules       a  The Tag must have been allocated access  during System configuration  to  the door for the time and day that it was presented  through an Access    Group           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 16    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview        b  A Tag Level relaxation or restriction of the door access requirements may  apply  only certain Tag levels may have access for this Door Mode       c  A Door Mode relaxation or restriction may apply  The current Door Mode  may impose other restrictions on the Tagholder  such as    Supervisor  Unlock        Doors and Zones   Each door may have one or two Readers  namely  an Entry a
260. s   125 kHz Tags   Registration Interface Infra red Tags UHF Tags   with an ImproX RRM  Remote Reader  Mifare       NOTES     1  A Personal Access Code  PAC  is not a physical Tag  and is not read by any  Reader  It acts as a Tag  but must be entered manually via the PC  keyboard to register it    2  Wiegand  ASCII  Barcode  Magstripe and PAC Tags must be registered  manually via the PC keyboard    3  The ImproX RS USB Registration Interface  together with either an ImproX  RRA or RRM Reader  is one entity as far as the System Software  Configuration is concerned  The combination is therefore often referred to  as the USB    Registration Reader    in this manual    Compatible Tag Types   Below is a list of the Tag types which are compatible with IXP200 Systems  The   Software allocates a Level to the Tag  and this level can relax or restrict access   requirements when the door is operating in certain modes     The System provides read only support for the following types of Tags       a  Read Only Tags  125 kHz Manchester format    both Slim and  Omega      b   Writag 2048  non encrypted modes   125 kHz Read Write Tags     c  Writag 128  125 kHz Read Write Tags      d  ImproX RF 4 channel UHF Transmitter     e  ImproX IR Infrared Transmitter           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 13  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 1   System Overview        f  Wiegand  ASCII  Barcode and Magstripe are also supported as logical
261. s Group than to delete it            This concludes the configuration of the Access Groups              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 90  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       CHAPTER 7   TAG HOLDER CONFI GURATION    GENERAL    This chapter describes the configuration of Tags and Tagholders     TAG LEVELS    Tags compatible with the IXP200 System are Impro Slim Tags  ImproX  Read Write Tags  ImproX Infra red Tags and ImproX RF 4 Channel UHF Hand   held Tags  as well as Personal Access Codes  PACs      NOTE   4 registered fingerprint can be used as a Tag if the System includes a  Sagem MorphoAccess MA 200 Terminal finger print Reader  and is  configured for this purpose  See    Registering Fingerprints as Tags     later in this Section for the procedure for the registration of a  fingerprint     The user allocates a Level to the Tag  that can either relax or restrict access  when the door is operating in certain modes  However the Tag Level cannot  give access to any door  this is only done through an Access Group     For example  if a door is in the Supervisor Unlock mode  then the Visitor and  Normal level Tags would have access denied until a Supervisor level Tag has  been presented at the door  This is so even if they have an Access Group that  includes this door  The Tag Level works in conjunction with the Door Mode to  further control access to the door  After th
262. s output can be connected  for example  to a siren that is triggered  by alarms     Power Control  Alarm Arming Modes    An IXP200 System can be used in either of two principal modes  namely the  Power Control or Alarm Arming Mode  The IXP200 Controller must be hard   wired to suit the desired mode  The Mode selected depends on the connections  to Relay 2 on the Controller  for these connections refer to the IXP200 System  Installation Manual            June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 23  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 2   Controller Configuration       Power Control    If the System is operating in the Power Control Mode  then      When the first person enters any APB  Anti Passback  Zone Relay 2 on the  IXP200 Controller switches on immediately     The doors in the Zones must have APB selected  as the System maintains a  count of the number of persons in each zone     After the last person leaves an APB Zone and all zones are empty  the relay  switches off after 30 seconds     This arrangement means that Relay 2 in the Controller can be used to control  the state of electrical equipment in the Zones to conserve power when no  Tagholder is present     Relay 1 is activated for a 1 second pulse when a Door Forced or Door Open Too  Long event occurs at a door     Alarm Arming  Disarming    The Alarm System can be armed or disarmed at a Reader which has Alarm  Arming enabled  This is do
263. sation    0o  nnnnnnoninoninanano nono rro rr rr rr rr 143  Choosing a Locale for Translation esseer 143  TheBasiS ES en mere Avan en vad fess REA CATA as 143  CHOOSEa  Localia ara adoos 144  Translating  roekan tetova ev nate Atanas 145  Main Fame ran Lis ARR hats Ro er nt nat M nA Seika avr 146  Panel nement atteste ns en raie th de te 146  ONE gun Bree ST M t   146  Calendar ss Re MUR Le A Er satin iia debate d   de 146  Translate Web Reports    147  CHAPTER 15   DATABASE BACKUP AND RESTORE ccce 149  GENERALES cou aaea aE Re datas in he gee pan ni eee ARE    149  Why BackUD  seen plena 149  File EXA iia e   a 149  BACKUPS ccoo o cicle otto ne de 149  Scheduled Automatic Backup    149  Imm  diate Backup carcinoma o ei 151  CHAPTERT6   ARCHIVE occ codi 153  GENERA O Se teats ne 153  CREATING  AN ARCHIVES  coord tao dicas 153  INDEX aca an 156      June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 81    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  82  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 6   Access Groups       CHAPTER 6   ACCESS GROUP CONFI GURATI ON    General    The purpose of an Access Group is to define a set of access conditions  Access  is then given to Tags by allocating an Access Group to the Tag  that defines  when access is allowed and the doors through that access is allowed  Tags
264. screen     Selecting the Icon Text option displays the Icon Text dialog shown below     Icon Text Properties    x       Show Icon text    Hide icon text             Placement Background    Above icon Colour    6 edwin     Em    Default        Icon Text dialog                               This dialog permits the user to choose globally whether to display Icon Text   and if so  whether it should be displayed above or below the icons   The Background colour can also be selected     The Default button permits the user to select the settings chosen as the    default setting  These will then be applied automatically every time the program  is started     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 128  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics         Locate tagholder E 3 xi    First Name  clara  Last Name  Calisto    Department  ALL be              Find selected person      Locate Tagholder dialog    Locate Tagholder Option    The Tools option in the Graphics Menu permits the operator to find a  Tagholder  the System will indicate at that Reader a Tagholder last presented  his her Tag when this option is selected     Select the Tagholder as follows      1  In the Locate Tagholder dialog  enter the first and or last names of the  Tagholder  The Locate Tagholder dialog is shown above with details  entered     2  Click Refine  several Tagholder s names may appear in the main w
265. se  e g  network    fault    Communication Status  Green Communication with the Controller is normal   Ter Amber Terminal timeout  not responding  can be transient   Red Controller not responding     Active Transaction Panel    The bottom pane of the Main Application Window  similar to that shown on the  next page  is the Active Transaction Panel  This pane displays real time data   For example  as an employee or visitor presents a Tag  the access transaction  data is then displayed in the various fields of the Active Transaction Panel     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       File Hardware Configuration Tags Graphics Reports CardDesigner Help     l             Excel Site       Transactions   Alarms   Door Status         Seq Date Time Terminal Event Name   Tag           aros    com    Main Application Window    Active Transaction Panel Fields and Buttons    A brief description of the information that is displayed in the Active Transaction  Panel s fields and the functions of the buttons is provided below     Up  Down arrow  icons    Seq    Date  Time  Terminal    Event  Name  Tag    Used to open or close the pane  The mouse  can be used to drag the pane to the  appropriate size     Displays the Transaction number as recorded  by the Controller     Displays the date of the Transaction   Displays the entry exit 
266. ser can access  The selection of reports is performed using a Web  Browser     PASSWORD CONTROL OF REPORTS    The Administrator may enforce password control of reports  One global  password can be defined which gives access to all Reports except the  Configuration Reports  which are always accessible only with the Administrator  password  By default  passwords are disabled     To define and enable or disable the global password  select Web Reports  Password from the  XP200 File menu  The Web Reports Password dialog will  be displayed  see the next illustration      See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 5  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       A Web Reports Password   xj    E               User Name WEBUSER    New Password    Confirm Password      ARE    Web Reports Password dialog  If a new global password is required     1  Enter the password    2  Enter the password again to confirm it    3  To enable the password  ensure that the box is checked    4  To disable the password  ensure that the box is unchecked    5  Click Apply to save and exit  or Cancel to exit without saving     ACCESSING AND USI NG THE REPORTS FACILITY       NOTES    1  The  XP200 Software must be running in order to access Web Reports     2  The Web Reports can be accessed from any machine  PC  on the same LAN  as the  XP200 Host PC     The Web Reports facility can be accessed in several ways as follows    Method 1   U
267. sing the Speed Button in the Toolbar    1  Start the IXP200 program     2  A shortcut to the Web Reports is provided by the E  icon      3  A log on dialog  see next graphic  will be displayed if Web Reports  password is enabled     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 6  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports                                Password Page      Microsoft Internet Explorer FE  lej xj  File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea  Back    gt    Q A   Asearch Favorites meda   B G   Address E http   localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports  WebMainPage z   Go  Links  gt   Please Login      Users Name   WebUser  Users Password        Return to the Web Reports Main page          a Done mal  de Local Ex  Web Reports Log on dialog     4  The Web Reports for I XP200 screen shown will be displayed     Method 2   Using the Menu    1  Select Reports from the Main Top Menu     2  Select Web Reports     3  Start the  XP200 program     4  A log on dialog will be displayed if Web Reports password is enabled    5  The Web Reports for IXP200 screen shown will be displayed     Method 3   Using the Browser  e g    nterNet Explorer or Netscape     1  Start the IXP200 program     2  If you are viewing the Reports on any other PC on the same LAN as the  Host PC  start the Web Browser and type the following URL    http   machinename index html  where    machinename    is the name of the  Host 
268. sn     Figure 1   Installation introductory screen       To install the IXP200 Software  proceed as follows     1  If a previous version of IXP200 is installed  this must be uninstalled      2  Run the Setup exe file in the root folder on the CD to install IXP200 V6 0 and  the associated applications           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12      3  Select the path to the Installation folder  By default  the files will be copied into  the folder IXP200      4  From V4 0  the Database Management System has been changed from  InterBase to Firebird  The Installer Software will automatically detect the  presence of InterBase and will exit the setup process and ask the user to  uninstall InterBase before restarting the Installer  Once restarted  the Installer  will install Firebird if it has not previously been installed  See Installation of  Firebird      NOTE  There is one condition here  If Firebird is already installed but the  password for Firebird is not    masterkey     the IXP200 default password    then the Installer will try to re install Firebird and display a message to  stop the Firebird or InterBase server  In this case  just click OK and ignore  the message      5  Start icons will automatically be created for  XP200      6  Configuration information is stored in the    proxette properties    file in the  IXP200 folder  Defaults are supplied which should be sufficient for most  insta
269. spended    If checked will reset the APB status of the Tag in  the Controller to neutral    Displays the date when the Tag will be active   yyyy mm dd   blank   Indefinite     Displays the date when the Tag will expire   yyyy mm dd   blank   Immediate     Displays the time of day on the Start Date when  the Tag will be active  hh mm 24 hour format     If the Start Date is blank  the Start Time is  ignored    Displays the time of day on the Expiry Date when  the Tag will expire  hh mm 24 hour format            June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice Page 3  100    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 7   Tagholders       If the Expiry Date is blank  the Expiry Time is    ignored    Access Group   The Access Group allocated to the Tag    Usage   Identifies Tag usage if issued with more than one   Optional     Message   A pre defined message associated with the Tag   Optional     New Tag button         Allows entry of a new Tag record    Delete button       Removes the Tag from the Tagholder     Apply   Save and exit     Cancel   Exit without saving changes   Print Card button   Print Card        NOTE  Several types of registration devices can be used in an  XP200 System    These are     e The  XP200 Controller    e The ImproX ProxPal    e The ImproX RS USB Registration Interface together with an  appropriate Remote Registration Reader  this combination is often  referred to in this manual as the ImproX 
270. stallation personnel  This is done using a  label supplied with the unit  and an ImproX Unit Location Chart  provided with  every ImproX IXP200 Controller   This label must be attached to the Chart  and  a unique description of the unit s physical location must also be recorded on the  Chart  Where applicable  record the unit as an Entry or Exit Reader     If this procedure is followed it makes the Configuration of the units in software  a simple matter by providing a record of all the information required           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 17  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       1 XP200 Software Start up  Start the IXP200 software either from the IXP200 icon on the desktop or from  the Programs menu     XP200 folder     On software start up  the user is presented with a Log on dialog to log on to  the database  see    IXP200 Log on Window    on the next page      l IXP200 Logon     Database       C1XP200WatabaserProxette gdo H  Username  Browse     Password    User ID  NAAA    joj    IXP200 Log on Dialog          Before logging on  first check the database location  The default pathname for  the database is C  IXP200 Database Proxette fdb  If this is not the correct  location  click the Browse button and locate the Proxette fdb database     Enter the UserName    SYSDBA    and the Password    masterkey    and press Enter or  click OK  This is the default admi
271. ster Server  Dialog     2  Select Local Server and then enter a description of the Server  e g  Access  Control PC      3  Enter the User Name    SYSDBA    and Password    masterkey        SYSDBA    is the  Administrator User Name  that cannot be changed  and    masterkey    is the  default Password that is valid for any new Firebird Database  In fact this is the  Administrator password for the Server and gives access to all Firebird  Databases registered on this Server     4  The default password must be changed later  see    Changing the Password     to  ensure the security of the Database  This is the most important password for  the System  giving full access to all tables      5  Click OK to save and exit    6  An entry for the Server will now appear in the left hand pane     From this point on  when using IB Console  select the Server and log on using a  valid User Name and Password     CAUTION          A copy of the Administrator   s User Name and Password must be given to  the Manager of the Company   Owner of the System for safekeeping  EVERY TIME THE PASSWORD IS CHANGED  If this password is lost there  can be no access to the Database        CHANGI NG PASSWORD OR ADDING ANOTHER USER    To carry out either of these operations  first     1  Select the Server icon in the left hand pane      2  Log on  Successful connection is shown by a green tick  check  mark next to  the Server icon      3  Click the   sign next to the Server icon to expand the list of objects associ
272. t  triggers an Action in the system     A unique address allocated to each ImproX  unit during manufacture     A communications bus  which interconnects  the ImproX Controller and the Host PC  via either RS485 or RS232     A Host is defined as a PC that  communicates with the ImproX Units via  the IXP200 Controller   See also Local  Host PC   In IXP200 Systems  a single  Host can perform all functions  or a Host  can be used with a separate Server PC           June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 3    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM  IP  address   Keypad    Lift  elevator  Reader    Location    Logical Address    Master    Non reader    Personal Access Code    PIN    Read  Write Tags    Reader    EXPLANATION  Internet Protocol  address     A set of pushbutton keys mounted in the  cover of a Terminal  which permit the entry  of data into the system     A reader is installed in a lift  elevator  and  operates in conjunction with Improx 016  Output Terminal to activate lift  elevator   floor buttons  When a Tag is presented to  the reader those buttons allocated to the  Tag become active for a limited period      See Door      A unique address allocated to each unit in  a system by the IXP200 Software     A person s unique record in the Database     A unit that does not have the ability to  read Tags  This includes Input and Output  Terminals  which are used for Lift   Elevator  Control and 
273. ta subject to change without notice Page 4 10  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports          Password Page   Microsoft Internet Explorer a lex     File Edit View Favorites Tools Help       Heak                  Qseach GFavortes Bristory   Es E  ne                       Please insert the Administrators Name and password      Subrnit      Administrators Name    Administrators Password      Return to the Web Reports Main page              E  Done FT  EE Local E  Password Page  See next page   June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 11      IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports            3 Configuration Main Page   Microsoft Internet Explorer     5  xj  File Edit View Favorites Tools Help      Back       O A A  Asearch  Favorites   meda   Ey S    Address    http   localhost webreports serviet net impro ipx2 web webreports  ConfigMainReport 7  Ao   Links  gt                     Configuration Main Page             Door and Access Group Inputs and Time Triggered  Configuration Reports   Configuration Reports     Access Group Configuration 10 Device Configuration     Door Access Configuration Input Trigger Configuration  i     Door Configuration Time Triggered Configuration    Door Mode Configuration      Terminal Configuration  Tag Configuration Reports    Tag Configuration    Tag Holder Configuration  Pa  Return to the Web Reports main page         le E Local intranet  Configuration Main Page  Part
274. tallation containing  one Site     A user s proximity access card        person to whom one or more system  Tags have been allocated     Grouped Access Patterns which may be  assigned to a Tag  and named as a group  for easy selection  Each Access Group has  up to eight Access Patterns     One of four levels which qualify Tag access  and allow additional functions     A Slave device which communicates with a  Controller via an RS485 bus  and  operates according to pre defined modes   For example  a unit which captures access  data  from Tags and or a keypad  or which  controls access points  such as doors      A type of unit which interfaces directly to  an IXP200 Controller via an RS485  Terminal Bus  Terminals may be readers or  non readers  but never remote readers     An RS485 Bus which interconnects a  Controller with the associated ImproX  Terminals     Each Terminal must be named by the  Operator when configuring the system  The  name used must be identical to the name  used on the ImproX Unit Location Chart for  the system  as well as any interconnection  diagram used     An internally initiated time dependent  occurrence that triggers an Action in the          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 7 6    Section 7   Glossary of Terms       TERM    Unassigned Unit    Unit Location Chart    Valid Tagholder    Zone    ABBREVIATIONS    ABBREVIATION  APB  GUI  IP  IR  OEM  RF  SLA  UHF    EXPLANA
275. the emergency generator and the ovens in the  laboratory     There are two departments  Administration and Laboratory     Other details of the System are included as appropriate in the software  configuration information              June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 5  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12        Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 1   Introduction       Manual Editing Facility    The current version of PC software and Controller firmware allow manual  capture and editing of Tag data via the Controller keypad and LCD  This feature  is described in Section 6 of this manual     IXP200 Toolbar I cons    In the table below is a brief description of the shortcut Icons available to the  user when configuring an  XP200 System                          Bal General System Setup  di  Tagholders and Tags    Im ones 00d Door   e    roues   el Inputs and Outputs  Web Reports    A Ti Event Triggered 0  Help       a Access Groups  AE SE dal                Certain common functions are performed using buttons identified by icons   These buttons are shown below  In the text  the names shown are used to  describe these buttons                          Building Graphics         Apply or ox ES   cancel   GD   Add     delete    Sy    Edit O    First   E   Previous QD las        Next SH   Print Card    Ai    Scale Floor Plan       Next Tag       Previous Tag       te       Show related Base Plan       Batch Print                June 2
276. time of the Tagholder     Displays the identity of the door or Terminal  where the transaction occurred     Displays the type of Event that was recorded   Displays the Tagholder   s name   Displays the Tagholder   s Tag number           June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice Page 3 11    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       Alarm Panel Fields and Buttons    A brief description of the information that is displayed in the Alarm Panel s fields  and the functions of the buttons is provided below     Status  Seq  Date  Time  Terminal    Event    Operator  Tagholder    Acknowledge All    Acknowledge    Indicates the current status of a displayed  alarm  Acknowledged or Unacknowledged      The transaction number as recorded by the  Controller     The Date the alarm condition occurred   The Time that the alarm condition occurred     The Terminal at which the alarm condition  occurred     The type of Event which caused the alarm to  be triggered     The Operator who acknowledged the alarm     Tagholder number associated with the alarm   e g  in the case of access made under duress     This pushbutton acknowledges all currently  displayed alarms     This pushbutton acknowledges the currently  highlighted alarm     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies    Data subject to change without notice Page 3 12    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configurati
277. ting the history of all  transactions up to that time     This function should generally only be used when the data is not valid  e g   during the installation phase  or when a Controller has been replaced     CAUTION  The use of the Clear Transaction Buffer function clears the  Controller memory of all stored transactions  This data  will be irretrievably lost           THIS CONCLUDES THE CONFIGURATION OF THE   XP200 SYSTEM           USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 141  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other System Operations       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 142  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 14   Translation       CHAPTER 14   TRANSLATION    General    The text in the IXP200 application Software can be translated from English into  another language by the user     Translation   Localisation    This application is provided with English text  If localisation of the text is  required  it may be dynamically translated making use of the Locale and  Translate functions     Translated text is stored in property resource files  Once translation is  completed  these files should be distributed with the application     Choosing a Locale for Translation    The following paragraphs provide a guide of how to go about translating the  IXP200 Softw
278. tion       The Translate Text Dialog shows the original text displayed in the left hand  column of the table  The translated text will appear in the right hand column   Check the heading for the right hand column table  to ensure that the correct  locale is displayed     NOTE   7o sort a column in alphabetical order  double click the column header     To translate text       1  Click in the relevant table cell in the right hand column  or use arrow keys  to navigate       2  Type the desired translated text    3  When all the changes have been made  press Enter to confirm the entries    4  Click Apply to accept changes  or click Cancel to reject new changes     NOTE   DO NOT EDIT THE SAME CATEGORY TWICE IN A SESSION     If changes need to be made  close the application and restart before making the  changes  If you do edit more than once in a session  only the last translations  entered are recorded permanently  and previous translation done in that session  is overwritten with English text      Translate Web Reports    1  To translate Web Reports  first Choose Locale as described in previous  paragraphs     2  Go to the File menu and select Translate Web Reports     3  The Translate Web Reports dialog shown will be displayed      4  Select the type of report required from either the Configuration Reports  or the Transaction Reports combo box     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 147  IXP200 Software User Manual  
279. to determine  when there are no Tagholders in the Zone  Once all the Tagholders have  left the Zone  the System knows that power to appliances in the Zone  should be switched off     3  The relay  Relay 2  switches off 30 seconds after the last person leaves the  APB Zone    Alarm Arming   An Alarm System supplied by a third party can be linked to the  XP200 so that it   can be armed or disarmed via one or more of the keypad Terminals in the   IXP200 System  However the Alarm System can only be disarmed on its own   Panel  using its own password  unless it has a simple toggle switch           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 14  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview       When Armed  designated doors are set to the Armed Mode as indicated by their  Readers    status LED blinking Red     In this Mode only the Administrator Supervisor Tags can enter at these doors   Alarm Arming   Relay 2    A third party Alarm System can be linked to the IXP200 so that it can be armed  at any IXP200 Keypad Terminal designated for alarm arming     The Alarm System can be automatically disarmed by presenting a Supervisor or  Administrator Tag at an armed door     NOTE  Some Alarm Systems may additionally require a password to be  entered on the associated Alarm System Panel     Arming   To arm the alarm System      1  Present a Supervisor or Administrator Tag at the exit Readers    2  Press   on the keypad within 10 seconds
280. to enter a Zone Number      14  Door Entry Code mode  Enter a Door Entry Code for this Door if Door  Entry Code Mode is to be used for the Door  this requires a keypad  Terminal to be fitted at that Door   The valid range for a Door Entry Code is  1   65535     Click Apply to accept the new data into the System  or Cancel to reject new  data     NOTES     1  Changing to another panel before clicking on the Door Mode Panel s Apply  button  would result   n the new entry being rejected     2  The Door Mode Pattern for this door can be displayed by clicking Day  Mode  The Day Mode Setting Dialog is shown below   see the Day  Mode Setting sub section later in this document      Day Door Mode Pattern  Sunday Default Tag Mode  Monday Default Tag Mode  uesday Default Tag Mode  Wednesday   Default Tag Mode    hursday  Default Tag Mode  riday Default Tag Mode   Copy to All  Saturday Default Tag Mode    Holiday Default Tag Mode                  Zia    a       Day Mode Setting Dialog    Entry and Exit Tabs    To configure Entry and Exit Readers  proceed as follows      1  Select the required Door     2  Click on the Entry tab  An Entry Exit Panel similar to that shown on the  next page will be displayed     3  Enter all the required information for the Entry Reader     4  Click on the Exit tab to define the operation of the Exit Reader     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 35  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Sectio
281. to the Tagholder   s ISO credit card Tag  or on to  adhesive labels     Card printing may be either single sided or double sided     The Software allows for the inclusion of custom text as well as Tagholder details  from the System database  such as first and last names  department  and so on  in card templates  It is also possible to include custom images  such as a  company logo  as well as an image of the Tagholder from the database     CARD DESIGNER    To access the Card Designer  click on Card Designer in the Top Menu Bar   then on Card Designer       Card Designer   Administration Card E  loj xi    File Edit Database View Options Format Help  lo   elle   q  a                        Excel Services   Cd  TE lastname Pere                 DEPARTMENT Poo         le         EJES             Eli        CLl Administration Card                       Typical Card Template Design    The use of the Card Designer is described in the Impro Card Designer User  Manual  IXP333 0 0 GB XX  that is supplied with your IXP200 Software   please  refer to that manual           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 123  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 11   Card Design       A typical design for a card template is shown on the previous page for  reference           END OF CHAPTER                June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 124  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12 
282. ton to display a log of the Auto ID process  The first time  Auto ID is done  new units should have been found as indicated by an  amber icon  These units have now been assigned logical addresses and are  available as Terminals to assign to doors and for Building Management and  lifts  elevators      If Auto ID fails it can be repeated until it succeeds  It may require more  attempts if there are many units in the System     If new units are added later  Auto ID must be executed again to detect them  and to assign Logical Addresses to them     CAUTION  If a unit needs to be replaced or removed altogether   refer to the Section Hardware  Replace Unit for the  correct procedure  This is most important to preserve  data associated with the faulty unit     NOTE   f a unit  or units  have been removed and are awaiting replacement   the following warning dialog will be displayed     Le xl    A Unit s  are awaiting replacement  AutoID will not replace but create new unit s     Cancel AutoID   No               Unit Awaiting Replacement    Warning    You can now proceed to Configuration of the System as detailed below     SYSTEM STARTUP    At startup  the software automatically locates the System database  It then  allows a user to log on with a Log on Name and Password  The target database  URL  Universal Resource Locator  is read from the Proxette  properties file     SYSTEM CONFI GURATI ON PROCEDURE  This section describes the Configuration of the System     NOTE   7he terminology 
283. ts Main page      f                                                                                  Date Time Source Source Terminal Address   Event Operator     2003 0606   1431 30   Controller   mm   PowerUp   2003 0606   143408   Controller 01010100   Pow  Up  2003 06 10   11 45 43   Controller 01010100   Power Up  2003 06 13   09 47 39 Controller 01010100 Power Up  2003 06 13   09 52 08   Controller 01010100   Power Up  2003 06 13   10 14 46   Controller 01010100   Power Up  2003 06 13   10 22 21   Accounts Door 01010103   Power Up  2003 06 13   10 22 22 Rear Door In 0101010B   Power Up  2003 06 13   10 22 22 Car Park 0101010      Power Up  2003 06 13   10 22 22 Accounts Door 01010101   Power Up  PT    EE vocal intranet    Typical Status Report    The Status Report provides a record of the Status Events at any of the System s  Terminals and at the Controller  i e  the System status  for the time period  specified  for example Terminal Timeout  Power Up  etc     Selecting the Date from or Date to option causes a drop down calendar to be  displayed  as described previously under Access Reports      If no Date or Time filter is selected  the date defaults to the current date  and  the time period to 00 00 to 23 59 59     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4  31  OIXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       PERSON I NFORMATI ON REPORTS    Hours Worked in APB Report       E     Hours Worked in AP
284. types are    xi       archived   Archiving Options  Archive Delete    Access Transactions  e  O                Alarm Transactions O  Status Transactions a 19    OK     Cancel            Archiving Options dialog          June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page 3 154    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 16   Database Archive        6  Select the Delete option if transactions must be deleted from the current  database and not written to the archive database  in other words if they are  no longer required at all     7  Click OK to save the changed options and close the Archiving Options  dialog     8  Alternatively  click Cancel to ignore changes and close the dialog     Archiving Options    j xj    Archive date   2003 09 01  Archive folder   C IXP200atabase        Archiving Options       dialog     9  Click Archive to start executing the archiving process  Close the application  and check the log file on completion for any errors     NOTES    1  The Archive files are named for the date only  with an fdb extension  e g   20030509  fab     2  A log file is created for each Archive  e g  Archive 20030509 log  in the  1XP200l 0g folder           END OF SECTION                June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 155  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration    Chapter 16   Archive       INDEX    Access Group  83  84  85  86  89   
285. u   Add Edit      This Menu  Access Group  de    Data to be Edited  or Options 03 Lab Staff CRESS  Keys available in this Menu Groups             Explanation of Displayed I nformation    The LCD information will be formatted as shown on the previous page  The top  line shows the name of the next higher menu  the second line shows the name  of the menu selected  the third line the options available  in a few cases this will  be information which can be edited instead of pre set options   The last line  shows the keys which can be used in the selected menu     Each menu is described in detail in the paragraphs which follow     Once the Controller Manual Editing menu has been entered  the next Add Edit  screen will be displayed  Detail of this screen and the first level menu options  offered are shown in the diagram First Level Menus              gt  System Off line         Present  Administrator s Tag to  Controller      6  Tagholders Settings  B menu k D D     menu     see separate diagram  see separate diagram  for details of Tagholders menu  for details of Settings menu        A                                                          First level menus vsd    First Level Menus  First Level Menus    The following first level options are available in the Controller First Level Menus    e  Tagholders  e   Settings          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 9  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Once the PC has been 
286. une 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 17      IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       Reader Configuration Report    J  Reader Configuration      Microsoft Internet Explorer METE  File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    Back    gt      A      Search Favorites   media  4   Eh    G   Address      http jflocalhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2 web webreports ReaderConfigReport  gt    Go Links  gt     Reader Configuration                                 Export Report  CSV                 01010107 01010101          40 40       0 0  Normal Normal                None None None          00000000 00000000   00000000  False False False   NIC NIC   N O                                                 Reader Configuration Report    This report provides a list of configuration information for each Reader in the  System  including the indications given when an Allowed Tag or a Denied Tag is  presented     See next page       June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 4 18    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 4   Reports       INPUTS AND TIME TRIGGERED CONFI GURATI ON REPORTS    10 Device Configuration Report        1 0 Device Configuration      Microsoft Internet Explorer    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help            Back    gt        3   Asearch  Favorites meda  4   Eh    G  Address ja http  localhost webreports servlet net impro ipx2  web  webreports 1ODeviceConfigReport hd G
287. une 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 5  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       The communications timeout value determines the length of time the PC will  wait for a response from Terminals before assuming there is a communications  error     In Systems where a different communications medium is being used  e g   ethernet or radio modems     The Minimum comms timeout time can be set using the combo box in this  dialog  The default timeout is 300 milliseconds  This can be extended in 100  millisecond steps to a maximum of 3 000 milliseconds     To test the communications time from the Controller or a Terminal to the PC     type the Logical Address of the Controller or Terminal into the boxes provided   and click Test  The Maximum Time and Average Time will be reported     FIRMWARE UPGRADING       File Config File Versions Help          Firmware Upgrade          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 6  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities Chapter 2   Firmware Upgrade Utility       Unit Type    For IXP200 Systems  select either Terminal or 200 Controller as appropriate   The other two options only apply to IXP300 400 Systems     Upgrade Type  Single unit    Select single unit when only one unit needs to be upgraded   All units    Select all units when all units need to be upgraded at the same time  This  method is 
288. used in this Section assumes a working knowledge of  Windows conventions on the part of the Reader           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 20  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 1   Introduction       1 XP200 System Configuration Requirements    The IXP200 Access Control System must be configured in the following order  before the System can be used   Controller  Doors  Readers  Door Mode  Patterns  1 0 Terminals  Time Event Triggered Actions  Access Groups   Tagholders and Tags     In this section  the data to be captured for configuration of the System is  presented  Diagrams of actual Graphical User Interface  GUI  screens and  panels are presented  showing the type of data to be captured for each one   The GUI for this System is called the IXP200     The configuration sequence is     1  Configure the Controller      2  Assign all unassigned Terminals to Doors  set up Door Mode Patterns as  required and assign these to Doors and Zones      3  Configure the Input Output Terminals  optional     4  Configure the Time Event Actions  optional      5  Configure Access Groups     6  Configure Tagholders and Tags     7  Configure Holidays     8  Define Messages  optional      Steps  1  to  6  must be completed for each new installation     USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 21  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3
289. utton and browse through the folders to find the required  CSV files      4  Select the file to be imported and click  Open   This may need more than  one iteration to select the files into the CSV Importer  Once selected   ensure that the Department CSV file is first on the list  before Master CSV      5  To start the process  click the    Start button  When complete  a  confirmation message will be displayed  Any errors will be recorded in a  csvimport log file  named for the date  in the log folder located in the  IXP200 folder           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5  14  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Utilities    Chapter 3   CSV Importer Utility       INDEX  communications port  5  Controller  5  6  7  8  10  Controller Port  5  10  current firmware  5  8  database  3  4   Default Message  5  10  default timeout  6  empty databases  3  existing database  3  fault  9   Firmware Upgrade  5  6  firmware version  7    main database  3  new release  3  new site  3   new system  7  password  4   PC  5  6  10  RS232  5  10  RS485  5  10  script  3  4  System Tools  5  8  Terminal  5  6  7  8  10  Terminals  6  10       installation  3 test communications  8  locale  3 timeout  5  6  log folder  4 upgrading  3  7  Logical Address  5  6  7  9  10 user data  3  USER   S NOTES     June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 5 15    IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 5   Uti
290. w  data Display   Resetting   Refresh  old data Refresh old data  Reset System menu vsd          Reset System Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     6   26    Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Debug Mode Menu    This menu permits the selection of the Debug Mode  In this mode information is  provided on the LCD concerning system conditions associated with a Tag when  it is presented     Denied Time In     This facility is intended for use by installers                   lt   Settings  gt   To from Tagholders  Menu    To from other Settings  Menus    To from other Settings  Menus         Debug Mode    Options    Debug Mode OFF Debug Mode OFF  CEPSA Debug Mode ON       y  Option Selected                Store new data                        Refresh old data       Y          Debug Mode menu vsd                Debug Mode Menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Page 6 27  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 6   Controller Manual Editing Facilities       Alarm Arm Relay Menu    This choice is governed by the requirements of the third party alarm system    The menu permits the choice of      a  Latched operation of the alarm arm relay  relay  2  in the Controller  When  activated  the relay will remain operated until the alarm system is disarmed     b  Pulsed operation of the relay  When activated the relay operates for a  period of approximately 1 second  and then releases                 lt   S
291. ware User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page    3  134    Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics       USER   S NOTES          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 135  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 12   Graphics             June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  136  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other System Operations       CHAPTER 13   OTHER SYSTEM OPERATIONS    General    Several System configuration operations  that may need to be carried out from  time to time  are described below     Full Data Upload    If the Controller memory becomes corrupt  the Controller needs to be cleared of  its current Configuration Tables  and then a Full Upload is required to update  all configuration data to the Controller from the PC Database     The clearing of the Configuration Tables has no effect on the Transaction  Buffer   To Upload data proceed as follows      1  Click on Configuration on the toolbar     2  Select Start Full Upload from the dropdown menu     3  The System takes a while to clear and then uploads the configuration data   Reset Anti Passback  APB     This function is used to Reset the Anti Passback status of all Tagholders to  neutral  e g  if Tagholders have left the premises in an emergency  without  presenting their Tags  Resetting the A
292. ws Startup group  If Firebird Server is not running   check Services or look for the icon in the System tray for WIN98  Use  Windows Explorer and go to the IXP200 Tools  or go to Control Panel  where it  is installed as  Firebird 1 5 Server Manager   folder     c  Execute Firebird Manager     fbmgr exe     and start the Firebird Server  If it  cannot be run as a service  then ensure that Firebird Guardian is used  This will  restart Firebird Server automatically if it stops running  If this fails then it could  be that Firebird is not properly installed     d  The PC does not have an IP address  This is necessary even if it is not on a  network  Please refer to Appendix A     1B CONSOLE   DATABASE ADMINISTRATION UTILITY    To run IBConsole      1  Go to Start     2  Then go to Programs    3  Then go to Firebird    4  Select IB_ Console      5  If IBConsole is not installed  copy it from the installation CD  namely   Firebird   BConsole exe  and place it in C  Program Files Firebird bin  Create a  short cut for this file and drag the shortcut into the Start Programs Firebird  folder     Register   Server          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 2  17  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     When using IBConsole for the first time  register the Server  PC  on which the  Database is installed  This gives access to any Firebird Databases installed on the  Server  To do this      1  Select Server   Register from the menu to pop up the Regi
293. y Mode Setting  Day   Days of the week  including a holiday   Door Mode   Pattern associated with each day   Pattern  Apply   This button accepts the selected patterns for the days   Cancel   This button cancels the selection and closes this panel   Copy to All   This button copies the selected pattern to all the other  days     NOTE    f the same Pattern is required for each day of the week  click Copy to  All   this copies the pattern to all 7 days of the week     To configure Day Mode Patterns  proceed as follows       1  In the Day Mode Setting dialog  select the required day from the Day field   the Door Mode Pattern field is then highlighted  click on the highlighted  area and select a pattern from the dropdown menu     LADEN Mode Setting E    Door Mode Pattern    Default Tag Mode    Copy to All         Day Mode drop down menu          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3 45  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 3   Door Configuration        2  Click Ok to accept the Day Mode data into the System  or Cancel to reject  data     DOOR MODE PATTERNS    The mode of the doors does not in itself provide access to Tagholders  this is  done by the Access Group   but can be used to further restrict access to Tags     There are 26 possible composite patterns  which can be defined by the user   Each of the patterns operates for a full 24 hour period  consisting of up to 8  time slots     For every do
294. y manufactured  Biometric Readers  These are listed in Table 10        Table 10   Third party Biometric Readers       UNIT NAME    TYPE OF READER             Handkey CR    Hand Registration Reader          Sagem MorphoAccess MA 200 Terminal    Fingerprint Reader          Sagem MorphoAccess MA 300 Terminal    Fingerprint Reader             June 2007 Impro Technologies  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Data subject to change without notice    Page 1 9             Section 1   System Overview       An Impro Wiegand 44 Reader and an ImproX PT Terminal are required when  using the Bioscript V Flex or the Sagem MorphoAccess MA 300 Fingerprint  Readers     An ImproX DL is required when using the Sagem MorphoAccess MA 200  Terminal Fingerprint Reader     NOTE  for details of the installation and use of the various Biometric    Readers  see the IXP System compatible Biometric Reader Installation  and User Manual     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 1 10  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 1   System Overview                  IXP200 Software IXP920 1 0 GB IX P2 00 Se ri es    System Architecture   Typical example     In this example  a single PC is used for all functions   The configuration shown is for a 125 kHz Tag system     r G   For Mifare or Felica Tags  different Reader types must  tii EN RS485 be used  The example includes a USB link from the  A 3 Host Bus System to the Host PC  If your system 
295. ypes      Standard system devices  sl   AG ann z   4     Have Disk           lt  Back Cancel       Select a Device Driver Dialog     14  Scroll down to find Microsoft from the Select a Device Driver Screen  and then click on Microsoft     See next page          June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 8 11  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 8   Appendices Appendix 1   Basic Windows Information          Add Remove Hardware Wizard    Select a Device Driver D   Which driver do you want to install for this device  Y    Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Next  If you  have a disk that contains the driver you want to install  click Have Disk     Manufacturers  Models   Microgate  Micronics Cros ck Adapter   Microsense 4   NT Apm Legacy Interface Node   Microsoft    Windows Sound System Compatible  WDM     Microsoft Corporation of  anta                 Have Disk           lt Back Cancel       Select a Device Driver Screen     15  In the Models Screen select Microsoft Loopback Adapter and click  Next     Add Remove Hardware Wizard       Start Hardware Installation   a  Windows is ready to install drivers for pour new hardware  SY    HE  Microsoft Loopback Adapter       Windows will use default settings to install the software for this hardware device  To  install the software for your new hardware  click Next        Models Screen     16  The System Settings will display the Start Hardware Installatio
296. ystem Operations        5      6    7     Click Yes when prompted to replace the Terminal   If the Terminal was to  be removed altogether  No would be clicked     Disconnect the Terminal as instructed by the Information message   Reconnect the replacement Terminal in the same position as the old one     It should be of a similar type  e g  Reader replaces Reader type and 10  Terminal replaces 1O Terminal type     NOTE  Do NOT perform an Auto ID before completing this procedure  as this     8    9     would create a new unit ID instead of replacing an existing one  If  required  the Replace or Uninstall Dialog may be closed at this point  to continue at a later stage  In this case  when the dialog is re opened   select the Terminal to be replaced  the Fixed Address should be  00000000   and continue from the next step     Click Replace and click Yes when prompted   Select the Terminal type from the dropdown list and click Apply      10  Enter the fixed address obtained from the label of the new Terminal and    click Apply to install      11  The new Terminal is now installed    12  Click Close to exit the window    13  Polling will restart automatically     Replacing a Controller    To Replace a Controller  proceed as follows       1    2    3      4      5    6      7    8    9     Select the Controller from the list and click the Uninstall    Confirm by clicking Yes or exit by clicking No     An Information message may advise that Uninstall failed  Click Yes to  uninstall an
297. yway as nothing further can be done     Click Yes to reply to prompt that the Controller is to be replaced   NOTE   This step is very important  Click Close to exit the window     An Information Message will appear  stating that no units have been  identified for the site  Polling will not start     Exit the program   Disconnect the Controller     Reconnect the replacement Controller in the same position as the old one   It should be of the same type  namely an ImproX Ixp200 Controller with  the correct version of firmware      10  Restart the program    11 A Database Hardware Check message will appear stating that the    Controller detected does not match the database           June 2007 Impro Technologies Data subject to change without notice Page 3  140  IXP200 Software User Manual  Issue 12     Section 3   System Configuration Chapter 13   Other System Operations        12  Close the message and select Replace Unit from the Hardware menu    13  Select the Controller from the list and click Replace    14  Click Yes when asked if the Controller is connected to the bus      15 Enter the fixed address from the label of the new Controller when  prompted      16  Click OK to install    17 1f no message appears  the new Controller has successfully been installed    18  Click Close to exit the window and restart polling     Clear Transaction Buffer    This function is accessed via the Hardware Menu  Selecting this function  clears all transactions from the Controller memory  dele
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Voir-la-liste-des-de..  DSC-TX20  Kit detection de drogue sur matière Héroine Brune+Blanche-2200  S8BA-24D24D      LF User`s Manual  Brodit ProClip 654808  ZoneMaster All-Mode Surge Suppressors Installation  CH-LF3846 User Manual  OFC 1231 (DE) BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG 2 (EN    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file